Toshiba Cash Register EO1 11099 User Manual
TEC Electronic Cash Register  
FS-1650-4 SERIES  
Owner’s Manual  
Table of Contents  
S/A Managers Guide  
M/S Operator's Guide  
M/S Manager's Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTICE  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reason-  
able protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial  
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,  
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is  
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the  
interference at his own expense. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
WARNING  
“This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing  
Equipment Regulations.”  
“Cet appareil numénque de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le  
matériel brouilleur du Canada.”  
Copyright © 2001  
by TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION  
All Rights Reserved  
570 Ohito, Ohito-cho, Tagata-gun, Shizuoka-ken, JAPAN  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11099  
Safety Summary  
Disconnect  
the plug.  
Disconnect  
the plug.  
If foreign objects (metal fragments,  
water, liquids) enter the machines,  
first turn off the power switches and  
disconnect the power cord plugs from  
the outlet, and then contact your  
authorized TOSHIBA TEC repre-  
sentative for assistance. Continued  
use of the machine in that condition  
may cause fire or electric shock.  
When unplugging the power  
cords, be sure to hold and pull on  
the plug portion. Pulling on the cord  
portion may cut or expose the inter-  
nal wires and cause fire or electric  
shock.  
Connect a  
grounding  
wire.  
No  
Ensure that the equipment is  
properly grounded. Extension cables  
should also be grounded. Fire or  
electric shock can occur on improp-  
erly grounded equipment.  
Do not remove covers, repair or  
modify the machine by yourself. You  
may be injured by high voltage, very  
hot parts or sharp edges inside the  
machine.  
disassembling.  
Unauthorized modification is prohib-  
ited.  
This indicates that there is the risk of personal Injury or damage to  
CAUTIONobjects if the machines are improperly handled contrary to this indication.  
Precaution  
The following precautions will help to ensure that this machine will continue to function correctly.  
•
Try to avoid locations that have the following adverse conditions:  
*
*
Temperatures out of the specification  
Shared power socket  
*
*
Direct sunlight  
Excessive vibration  
*
*
High humidity  
Dust/Gas  
•
•
•
Do not subject the machine to sudden shocks.  
Do not press the keys too hard. Keys will operate correctly if they are touched lightly.  
Clean the cover and keyboard, etc. by wiping with a dry cloth or a cloth soaked with detergent and wrung out  
thoroughly. Never use thinner or other volatile solvent for cleaning.  
At the end of the day, turn the power OFF, then clean and inspect the exterior of the machine.  
Try to avoid using this equipment on the same power supply as high voltage equipment or equipment likely to  
cause mains interference.  
•
•
•
•
USE ONLY TOSHIBA TEC SPECIFIED consumables.  
DO NOT STORE the consumables where they might be exposed to direct sunlight, high temperatures, high  
humidity, dust, or gas.  
•
•
When moving the machine, take hold of the drawer and lift the machine.  
Do not place heavy objects on top of the machines, as these items may become unbalanced and fall causing  
injury.  
•
•
Do not block the ventilation slits of the machines, as this will cause heat to build up inside the machines and  
may cause fire.  
Do not lean against the machine. It may fall on you and could cause injury.  
Request Regarding Maintenance  
•
Utilize our maintenance services.  
After purchasing the machines, contact your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance once per year or  
so to have the inside of the machines cleaned. Otherwise, dust will build up inside the machines and may cause fire or  
malfunction. Cleaning is particularly effective before humid rainy seasons.  
•
Our maintenance service performs the periodic checks and other work required to maintain the quality and  
performance of the machines, preventing accidents beforehand.  
For details, please consult your authorized TOSHIBA TEC representative for assistance.  
•
Using insecticides and other chemicals  
Do not expose the machines to insecticides or other volatile solvents, as this will deteriorate the cabinet or other parts  
or cause the paint to peel.  
(ii)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STAND-ALONE LEVEL  
OPERATOR’S GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS ................................................................................................................... 1  
2. UNPACKING.................................................................................................................................... 2  
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE......................................................................................... 3  
4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS ................................................................................ 4  
5. DISPLAY .......................................................................................................................................... 5  
6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATING THE ECR .......................... 9  
7. CASHIER SIGNING OR CASHIER KEY OPERATIONS............................................................... 14  
8. KEYBOARD LAYOUT.................................................................................................................... 21  
9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY ......................................................................................................... 22  
10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT.................................................................. 28  
11. JOURNAL AND RECEIPT PAPER-END DETECTOR .................................................................. 65  
12. ECR PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR................................................................................. 65  
13. GUEST CHECK PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR .............................................................. 65  
14. PRINTER GUIDE OPEN DETECTOR ........................................................................................... 65  
15. PAPER ROLL REPLACEMENT AND OTHER MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS .......................... 66  
16. SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................................... 72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
1. TO OUR CUSTOMERS  
Thank you for choosing the TEC electronic cash register FS-1650 series. This instruction manual  
provides a description of the functions and handling of this register and should be read carefully to  
ensure optimum performance. Since every consideration has been given to safety and reliability, there  
is no danger of damaging the machine by incorrect operation.  
Please refer to this manual whenever you have any questions concerning the machine. This machine  
has been manufactured under strict quality control and should give you full satisfaction. However, if the  
machine is damaged during transit, or there are any unclear points in this manual, please contact your  
local TOSHIBA TEC representative.  
• The specifications described in this manual may be modified by TOSHIBA TEC, if necessary.  
• Be sure to keep this manual for future reference.  
- 1 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
2. UNPACKING  
Paper Roll 45 mm x Ø50 mm (2 pcs.)  
Mode Key  
(REG Key, MGR Key, MA Key,  
S Key; 2 pcs. respectively)  
Receipt Cover Key (2 pcs.)  
Stamp lnk (1 pc.)  
Ribbon Cassette (1 pc.)  
Journal Reel (1 pc.)  
Drawer Key (2 pcs.)  
Owner's Manual (1 pc.)  
- 2 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
3. APPEARANCE AND NOMENCLATURE  
Journal Window  
Customer Display  
Receipt Outlet  
Operator Display  
Mode Lock  
Power Switch  
Drawer  
Keyboard  
• Power Switch........ The power switch is provided at the right-hand side of the cabinet. The AC power  
is turned on when the switch is pushed to ON, and turned off when the switch is  
pushed to OFF.  
- 3 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
4. MODE LOCK AND MODE SELECTOR KEYS  
4.1. MODE LOCK  
(POSITION)  
(FUNCTION)  
SET ........... In this position, the register will allow pro-  
gramming operations  
MGR  
X
.................. (LOCK position) The register operations are  
locked when the Mode Lock is in this posi-  
REG  
SET  
REG  
tion. Meanwhile, the Display Message and  
the current time are displayed.  
Z
Key  
REG .......... Normal cash register operations are carried  
out in this mode. However, the operations  
requiring a Manager Intervention cannot be  
MGR  
performed in this mode.  
Key  
X ............... The sale totals in memory can be read and  
the programmed data can be verified in this  
position.  
MGR ......... This position allows to register all normal  
cash register operations to be carried out in  
the "REG" mode and the operations requir-  
ing a Manager Intervention.  
MA  
Key  
.............. This is the "Negative Mode", which automati-  
cally processes all the entries in the reverse  
way, i.e. positive items into negative, and the  
negative into positive. It is usually used to  
return or cancel all the items once pur-  
chased in a sale in the "REG" or "MGR"  
mode.  
Z ................ All the resettable total and their respective  
counters in memory will be read and reset in  
this position.  
4.2. MODE SELECTOR KEYS  
REG Key:  
The REG Key is used by the cashier or clerk who operates the  
register.  
MGR Key: The MGR Key is used by the store manager or a person authorized  
by the manager.  
MA Key:  
The MA Key is used by the store manager who will daily supervise  
the collection of money and the printout of transactions recorded by  
the register. This key is also used when programming the register.  
The keys may be inserted or pulled out at the "LOCK" or "REG" position.  
In the OPERATOR'S GUIDE, functions and operations will be described within the range  
of the Mode Lock positions of LOCK and REG using the REG key. Since operations  
requiring other positions and keys are controlled by the store manager, they are described  
in the MANAGER'S GUIDE.  
- 4 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
5. DISPLAY  
The operator display is located at the top of the register just above the keyboard.  
OPERATOR DISPLAY (Front Display)  
Upper Row  
(factory option)  
SLIP  
A
M
O
U
N
T
DPT RPT  
IN-LINE
TL  
ST  
CG  
SIGN ON  
Lower Row  
AL
M
R OFF  
MENU PRICE  
CLERK  
The customer display can be fixed as a rear display or moved to form a remote display. It can be moved  
up, down, to the right, and to the left, and thus is fully adjustable according to the position of the customer.  
CUSTOMER DISPLAY (Rear or Remote Display)  
Upper Row  
(field option)  
A M O U N T  
TL  
ST
CG
Lower Row  
- 5 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
5.1. UPPER ROW (16-digit dot windows)  
Alpha/numeric characters are displayed here as messages, sale item descriptors, prompts for the operator,  
etc. depending on the Mode Lock position and the operation sequence.  
(1) Mode Indications  
“LOCK” Mode  
Ifthedisplaystoremessageispreprogrammed, themessageisdisplayed. Whetherthemessagescrolls  
with maximum 64 characters or non-scrolls with maximum 16 characters is a program option. At the  
same time the current time is displayed in the lowest 5 digits of the Lower Row (example: 14-52 for the  
time 14:52).  
“REG”, “MGR”, or “ ” Mode Initial Display  
The message "LOG" is displayed in the lowest 3 digits of the Upper Row. It means that the cashier has  
signed OFF or signed OUT and thus the ECR is not operable for sales entries. (This display indication  
is applicable only when the Cashier Code Entry method is selected.) A Sign-ON or Sign-IN is expected  
to operate through the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key in this case.  
In the REG or MGR mode, a store message (described as the store message displayed in the LOCK  
mode above) can be displayed when there is no key-in operation takes place in 30 seconds. Whether  
it is displayed or not is a program option.  
Whether or not a store message is displayed during cashier sing-ON is a program option.  
Other Mode Initial Display  
The mode symbol of 1 character is displayed in the lowest digit:  
Digit No.  
4
3
2
1
P
X
Z
“SET” Mode  
“X” Mode  
“Z” Mode  
(2) Digit Range for Various Sales Items ("REG", "MGR", " ")  
16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Department/PLU Name (max. 16 characters)  
Transaction Item Name  
(max. 12)  
- 6 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
(3) Error Messages (in any mode except "LOCK")  
When an error occurs, an error message (programmable) is displayed, with an error buzzer gener-  
ated (a long tone).  
16 15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Error Message (max. 16)  
Read the Error Message, depress the [C] key to cancel the error status and tone, operate the  
sequence again after removing the cause of the error.  
The following table shows the cause of the error.  
ERROR MESSAGE TABLE  
Error Message  
Cause of the Error  
(Standard Setting)  
O P E R A T I O N E R R O R  
M A N A G E R R E Q U I R E D  
V A L I D A T I O N C M P  
C L O S E D R A W E R  
C O M P U L S O R Y C O D E  
S C A L E R E Q U I R E D  
S C A L E O U T  
Key Sequence or Operation Procedure Error  
The operation requires a Manager Intervention.  
The operation requires a validation print.  
The drawer must be closed before the operation.  
No code has been entered where it is compulsory.  
The [SCALE] key has not been depressed where required.  
The scale is malfunctioning.  
P C C O M M E R R O R  
C O D E E R R O R  
File Receive Error (When a PC is connected).  
An undefined code has been entered, or the entered code has already been  
defined.  
P R O G R A M E R R O R  
D R A W E R L I M I T  
The programming that you attempted is not acceptable.  
A media pick up operation is now required.  
V A L I D A T I O N E R R O R  
Some key other than [VALIDATE] is depressed when a validation slip has been  
inserted into the validation slot.  
C O M P U L S O R Y S L I P  
O R D E R T A B L E F U L L  
The operation requires a endorsement print.  
New order is entered when the order table is full on an ECR with the drive-  
through feature.  
R K P P A P E R E M P T Y ?  
R K P F A I L ?  
Paper of the remote kitchen printer has run out.  
Condition of the remote kitchen printer is abnormal.  
Printing lines to RKP exceeds 45.  
B U F F E R F U L L  
C O M P M O D I F I E R  
G C P B U F F E R F U L L  
E A T I N / T A K E O U T ?  
C O M P G U E S T N o  
M I S C E R R O R  
Entry of a modifier PLU is required.  
Buffer of the Guest Check Printer is full.  
Eat-in or Takeout has not been designated before finalizing a sale.  
Guest No. entry is required before finalizing a sale.  
Other errors  
It is recommended to prepare a copy of the above table, and place it near the register.  
- 7 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
5.2. LOWER ROW (10-digit 7-segment Numeric Display)  
AMOUNT (7 digits): Displays the numeric data, such as amount, quantity, etc.  
When the amount is negative, the symbol "-" is displayed as well.  
NOTE: When the following code is being entered, the digits for "RPT" and  
"DPT" may be used as well (all 10 digits). On exceeding the 10 digits,  
the lowest 10 digits are being displayed.  
Non-add Number (max. 18 digits)  
DPT (2 digits):  
Displays the Department Code of the department item just entered. The  
department name is also displayed in the Upper Row. It stays lit when repeating  
the same department item entry.  
When a PLU is entered, PLU name is displayed in the Upper Row.  
ProgramoptionallowsanECRtodisplayeitheracashierNo. orNos. ofPLUprice  
shift and menu shift instead of a department code. In this case, department code  
is not displayed even when department item is entered.  
RPT (1 digit):  
Displays the repeat count of the same Department or PLU item. The count is  
indicated from the second entry on, and only the lowest digit of the repeat count  
will be displayed even when the count exceeds nine (such as "0" for 10, "1" for  
11, etc.)  
5.3. TRIANGULAR LAMPS  
SIGN ON  
This lamp turns lit only when the Cashier Code Entry method is selected. It lights up  
when a cashier has signed ON or signed IN. It goes out when the cashier has signed  
OFF or signed OUT, and the message "LOG" is displayed in the Upper Row instead.  
ALM  
Lights up with the alarm buzzer generated to indicate that the last operation or numeric  
entry was an error. To clear the error status, depress the [C] key.  
R OFF  
Lights up when the Receipt-OFF mode is declared by the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or  
[RECEIPT]) key. In this condition, no receipts will be issued for a sale to be entered.  
It goes out by depressing the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [RECEIPT]) key again for Receipt-  
ON mode.  
TL  
ST  
Lights up on a finalizing operation with the total amount displayed when the sale is  
finalized without any amount tendered.  
Lights up when the [ST] key is depressed, indicating that the displayed amount is  
subtotal. The lamp is also illuminated when the [TXBL TL] or [FSTL/TEND] key is  
depressed, indicating that the displayed amount is the taxable total or food-stampable  
total. It also lights up when the amount tendered is less than the sale total with the  
shortage amount (balance due) is displayed.  
CG  
When an amount tendering operation is performed, it lights up with the change due  
displayed.  
5.4. STATUS LAMPS  
SLIP  
Lights up when a validation slip is properly inserted to allow validation print. It flickers  
to require a validation when the validation compulsory status has been programmed  
on the last operation. It also flickers to require an endorsement print using the Guest  
Check Printer or the Receipt/Journal Printer.  
IN-LINE  
It is used when the ECR is used as an terminal in a Master-Satellite system. When the  
ECR is used as a stand-alone machine, this lamp is not used.  
- 8 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
6. OUTLINE OF PREPARATION PROCEDURE BE-  
FORE OPERATING THE ECR  
This chapter shows the outline of set-up procedure of the ECR before actually starting the ECR  
operation.  
WARNING!  
Turn the POWER SWITCH to OFF before connecting the power cord.  
(1)  
(2) (3) (7)  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(8)  
1
2
3
4
5
Remove the cash register from the carton, referring to  
Chapter "2. Unpacking". And take out all the parts and  
accessories.  
Remove the tapes and seals for holding parts or protecting  
the register surfaces.  
Plug the power cord of the register into a wall outlet. Make  
sure that the outlet voltage matches that of the power  
required for the register.  
MGR  
-
X
REG  
SET  
Insert the REG key into the Mode Lock.  
Z
MGR  
-
X
REG  
SET  
Turn the Mode Lock to the REG position with the power ON.  
Z
- 9 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
6
Install the Receipt and Journal rolls (referring to the following  
section "Installing the Receipt/Journal Roll").  
Installing the Receipt/Journal Roll  
WARNING!  
Care must be taken not to injure yourself with the paper cutter.  
Installing the Receipt Roll  
MGR  
-
X
1
2
3
4
REG  
SET  
Turn the Mode Lock to the REG position with power  
ON.  
Z
To remove the Receipt Cover, insert the Receipt  
Cover Key to the Receipt Cover Lock, and then turn  
it 90˚ clockwise.  
Cut the paper end to make it sharp.  
Hold the paper roll so that the paper end will be fed  
from the bottom.  
- 10 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
5
Place the paper roll in the outer side holder of  
the two roll holders.  
There are the following two ways of receipt paper feed procedure.  
6
A: Manual installation  
B: Installation using the [RF] key  
A: Manual installation  
Lift the green lever on the receipt side.  
Insert paper from the rear of the printer  
until the leading edge of paper comes out  
by 10 cm.  
Lower the green lever.  
Attach the receipt cover.  
B: Installation using the [RF] key  
Insert paper from the rear of the printer  
until it won't go no further.  
Press the [RF] key to feed paper until the  
leading edge of paper comes out by 10  
cm.  
Attach the receipt cover.  
- 11 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Installing the Journal Roll  
Follow Steps 1 to 5 for "Installing the Receipt Roll" on the preceding pages, except that  
the paper roll should be placed inner side holder of the two holders.  
1
There are the following two ways of a journal paper feed procedure.  
2
A: Manual installation  
B: Installation using the [JF] key  
A: Manual installation  
Lift the green lever on the journal side.  
Insert paper from the rear of the printer until  
the leading edge of paper comes out by 30  
cm.  
Insert the leading edge of paper into the slit  
of the take-up reel to take up paper two or  
three times.  
Placethetake-upreelonthetake-upholder.  
Lower the green lever.  
Attach the receipt cover.  
B: Installation using the [JF] key  
Insert paper from the rear of the printer until  
it won't go no further.  
Press the [JF] key to feed paper until the  
leading edge of paper comes out by 30 cm.  
Insert the leading edge of paper into the slit  
of the take-up reel to take up paper two or  
three times.  
Placethetake-upreelonthetake-upholder.  
Attach the receipt cover.  
- 12 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Setting the Ribbon Cassette  
Detach the Ribbon Cover.  
1
Set the Ribbon Cassette.  
3
After setting the Ribbon Cassette, turn the knob  
of the Ribbon Cassette in the arrow direction  
several times to remove the slack on the ribbon.  
Attach the Ribbon Cover.  
4
- 13 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
7. CASHIERSIGNINGORCASHIERKEYOPERATIONS  
The FS-1650 adopts one of the following cashier-identifying operations.  
• CODE ENTRY METHOD, using the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key.  
• CASHIER KEY METHOD, (hardware option), using Cashier Keys.  
• CASHIER KEY METHOD, using [CLK] keys.  
7.1. CODE ENTRY METHOD  
Each cashier will sign-ON, sign-OFF, sign-IN, and sign-OUT through the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key.  
OPERATION: Mode Lock: REG (or, MGR or  
with Manager Intervention)  
([LOG/RECEIPT] = [LOG])  
(1) For single-drawer Machines  
A sign-on receipt is issued, and sales  
entries are now possible.  
-------  
[LOG/RECEIPT]  
Sign-ON  
2-digit manager-assign code (01 to 99)  
2-digit cashier's own secret code  
(01 to 99)  
9 [LOG/RECEIPT]  
A sign-OUT receipt is issued, and the  
cashier must leave the register for a  
while expecting to come back soon.  
Sign-OUT  
Asign-INreceiptisissued. Salesentries  
are now possible.  
Sign-IN  
(same as Sign-ON)  
[LOG/RECEIPT]  
A sign-OFF receipt is issued, and no  
sales entries will be accepted.  
0 [LOG/RECEIPT]  
Sign-OFF  
Sign-ON.......... to be operated to start the job.  
Sign-OUT ....... to be operated to leave the register for a while expecting to come back soon.  
Sign-IN ........... to be operated when the cashier comes back from a break declared by Sign-  
OUT.  
Sign-OFF ........ to be operated to end the job.  
- 14 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
NOTES:  
1. Sign-OFF or Sign-OUT may automatically be performed without operating each key  
operation on finalizing each transaction including Check (or other non-cash media)  
Cashing, No-sale Exchange from/to Foreign Currencies, No-sale, Received-on-Account,  
Paid-Out, Loan, and Pick Up if so set by a program option. When this option is selected,  
Sign-ON or Sign-IN is always necessary before starting every transaction.  
2. WhenthefinalizingmediakeyisprogrammedwithValidationCompulsoryorEndorsement  
Compulsory status, the automatic Sign-OFF or Sign-OUT will be executed after taking the  
validation or endorsement print of the media data.  
(2) For Multi-drawer Machines  
Operations are basically the same as those for Single-drawer Machines, except that a one-digit  
drawer No. is entered through the [@/FOR] key prior to the Sign-ON entry:  
Sign-ON  
[@/FOR]  
[LOG/RECEIPT]  
2-digit manager-assign code  
2-digit cashier's own secret code  
1 to 4 as Drawer No.  
By entering a Drawer No., the designated drawer will open on finalizing each sale by that cashier. It  
will cause an error if a Drawer No. already used by another cashier is entered.  
Sign-OUT  
Same as those for Single-drawer machines.  
Sign-IN  
Sign-OFF  
NOTES:  
1. A maximum of 4 different cashiers may sign-ON on a Multi-drawer Machine at the same  
time. To allow more than one cashier's sign-ON, the first cashier(s) must sign-OUT (not  
necessarily sign-OFF) before the next cashier signs ON.  
Accordingly, only the cashier being signed ON or IN can sign OUT or OFF.  
2. When the Drawer No. entry and the [@/FOR] key are skipped in a sign-ON, the drawers  
will automatically be assigned to the cashiers from the smaller No. to the larger.  
- 15 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
(3) Mode Changes With Signing Operations  
When Signed-ON or Signed-IN:  
The Mode Lock position changes are allowed within "LOCK", "REG", "MGR", and " ".  
Changing to any other position will be an error.  
When Signed-OUT:  
The Mode Lock may be turned to any position. However, cashier reports of the cashier being signed  
OUT cannot be taken in the "X" or "Z" position.  
When Signed-OFF:  
The Mode Lock may be turned to any position. Therefore, it is best for the cashier (or all the cashiers  
on a Multi-drawer Machine) to sign OFF before the Mode Lock is turned to the "LOCK", "X", "Z" or  
"SET" position.  
-- SIGNING OPERATION RECEIPT PRINT FORMAT SAMPLES --  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Closed : every Wednesday  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
*
S I G N O N  
*
*
S I G N O U T  
*
JONES  
0062 15:30TM  
JONES  
0070 15:36TM  
*
S I G N O F F  
*
*
S I G N I N  
*
JONES  
0063 15:30TM  
JONES  
0071 15:30TM  
NOTE: A program option provides a selection not to print nor issue receipts on any signing operation.  
- 16 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
7.2. CASHIER KEY METHOD (Hardware Option)  
When the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key is not installed, the Push-stay Cashier Keys may be pro-  
vided at the side of the Mode Lock:  
Push-stay Cashier Locks and Keys  
Light to indicate  
ON-status  
Cashier Keys 1 to 4  
Cashier Locks 1 to 4  
Each key is assigned to each cashier. The register will not operate in the "REG", "MGR", or " " mode  
unless one of these keys is inserted and pushed on or pushed-and-locked at the corresponding Cashier  
Lock. The light is lit when the key is in the ON-status.  
Each of the keys may be inserted and pulled out in the neutral position marked with "1" to "4" in the  
above figure, and two ways are provided to set the Cashier Key to ON status:  
PUSH-ON  
When simply pushed on and released, the Cashier Key is set to ON status. This ON condition will  
be cleared by any of the following conditions:  
1) when no key-in operations follow in three seconds.  
2) when the transaction is finalized.  
3) when another Cashier Key is pushed-on when outside a sale.  
4) when the Mode Lock is turned to another position.  
PUSH-AND-LOCK  
When pushed and turned to the right, the ON status is locked until it is turned back to release and  
another Cashier Key is set to ON.  
When another Cashier Key is attempted to push-and-lock, the register will entirely be locked.  
If a Cashier Key has already been set to ON and a sale is under way, another Cashier Key will be  
disregarded if attempted to ON.  
Under the CASHIER KEY METHOD, no receipts are issued, nor will the drawer open by setting a  
cashier key to the ON status.  
The multi-drawer feature may be taken with the Push-stay Cashier Keys. In this case, each of the  
drawers 1 to 4 is assigned to each cashier of Cashier Keys 1 to 4.  
The "SIGN ON" triangular lamp will not be lit in any occasion under the cashier key method. The light  
attached to each Cashier Lock will be lit instead.  
– 17 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
7.3. CASHIER KEY METHOD ([CLK] Keys)  
When the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG] key is not installed, [CLK 1] to [CLK 8]; max. 8 keys may be provided  
on the ECR keyboard.)  
Sale entries will be possible only when one of the [CLK] keys is depressed (in "REG", "MGR", or "  
"
mode). When the same [CLK] key is again depressed, the cashier is in Cashier OFF status.  
A program option provides a selection to display or not display the ON-status cashier code (1 to 8) at the  
"DPT" digit on the Lower Row of the Operator Display.  
Themulti-drawerfeaturemaybetakenwiththe[CLK]keys. Inthiscase,eachofthedrawersisassigned  
to the cashier of the following keys.  
Drawer 1 to [CLK 1]  
Drawer 2 to [CLK 2]  
Drawer 3 to [CLK 3]  
Drawer 4 to [CLK 4] to [CLK 8]  
- - Cashier ID Print on Sale Receipts - -  
On every sale receipt (issued in "REG", "MGR", or " " mode), the name of the cashier who has  
operated the entries of the sale is printed. The cashier name is programmable corresponding to  
each manager-assign cashier code (under the CODE ENTRY METHOD) or Cashier Key No. (under  
the CASHIER KEY METHOD).  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
VEGETABLE  
FRUIT  
TAX  
$3.00TF  
$1.30TF  
$0.26  
CASH  
$ 4 . 5 6  
ITEM  
JONES  
2
0070 15:45TM  
Cashier's Name  
– 18 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
7.4. TRAINING MODE START AND END  
When you have newly employed cashiers, you may provide some time for them to train their skills of  
operating the FS-1650. You are to start and end the Training Mode. Once entering the Training Mode, a  
cashier may operate just as ordinary sale entry operations. The data in the Training Mode are processed  
into the training cashier memory but not affect any actual sales data in business.  
Outside a sale, and in Cashier Signed-OFF condition for CASHIER CODE ENTRY  
Method  
CONDITION  
OPERATION FOR TRAINING MODES START  
■ Code Entry Method  
[LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG])....... A training-ON receipt is issued.  
2-digit manager-assign code of a cashier with Training status (01 to 99)  
2-digit cashier's secret code (01 to 99)  
■ Cashier Key Method  
Case 1: Set the Cashier Key programmed with Training status  
Case 2:  
[LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG])..... A training-ON receipt is issued.  
99  
Fixed to 99 for training purposes.  
ENTRIES IN TRAINING MODE  
Registering operation are allowed by the trainees:  
•
All sale or transaction entry operations are possible in the Training Mode,  
except: 1) The drawer will not open.  
2) The Consecutive No. on the receipt will not be incremented.  
3) Validation or Endorsement print is not available.  
4) Print occurs on receipt but not journal.  
OPERATION FOR TRAINING MODE END  
■ Code Entry Method, and Cashier Key Method Case 2  
0
[LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) .......... A training-OFF receipt is issued in both cases.  
■ Cashier Key Method Case 1  
Change from the current Cashier Key to another Cashier Key.  
Now the register is in a Signed-OFF condition. You may turn the Mode Lock to any position for its  
corresponding operations. To start sale entries, a cashier's sign-ON status is again necessary.  
– 19 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
-- Training Mode Receipt Format --  
Training Start (training Sign-ON) Receipt  
Training End (Training Sign-OFF) Receipt  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
Receipt issued in Training Mode  
*
*
T R A I N I N G  
O F F  
*
*
*
*
T R A I N I N G  
O N  
*
*
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
0079 15:51TM  
*
T R A I N I N G  
*
BROWN  
0079 15:51TM  
DAIRY  
$2,30TF  
Cheese-Half Pck $2,50TF  
Entry Contents  
TAX  
$0.29  
$ 5 , 0 9  
Tra  
i
n
in
g
M
o
d
er  
Head  
e
CASH  
ITEM  
2
*
T R A I N I N G  
*
BROWN  
0079 15:51TM  
– 20 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
8. KEYBOARD LAYOUT  
The following is typical keyboard layouts for the FS-1650 series. Since this series is designed to be capable  
of programming most of the keys to be placed in the desired place on the keyboard, this is merely example.  
The keyboard of your register should have its own layout acording to the store's requirements.  
---Flat Keyboard (US Standard) ---  
Department Keys  
(Department Preset-code Keys)  
PLU Preset-code Keys  
8
9
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
9
6
3
•
8
5
7
4
1
0
2
00  
ALL  
LOG  
RECEIPT  
ITEM  
CORR  
#
VOID  
TX1/M  
RF  
JF  
R/A  
PO  
VOID RECEIPT ISSUE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PR  
LC  
DOLL  
DISC  
TX2/M  
NS  
OPEN OPEN  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
RECALL  
@
TAKE EAT  
OUT  
VALI  
DATE  
C
IN  
FOR  
1.00  
MISC  
TEND  
7
4
1
0
8
5
9
6
3
•
CASH  
(FUNCTION 1)  
TOTAL  
5.00  
CASH  
(FUNCTION 2)  
CHK  
TEND  
AMT  
PLU  
10.00  
CASH  
(FUNCTION 3)  
ST  
2
AT/TL  
20.00  
CASH  
(FUNCTION 4)  
TXBL  
TL  
00  
Other keys not placed in the keyboard above:  
Additional Department keys (15 to 60)  
[CUR 1] to [CUR 5]  
[LOG]  
[RECEIPT]  
[CHECK No.]  
[DP#]  
[000] (Triple-zero Key) [SI1/M], [SI1/TL]  
[CHG TIP]  
[TIP PAID]  
[SALES PERSON]  
[TRAY TL]  
[CALL NO.]  
[BTL RTN]  
[% +]  
[SI2/M], [SI2/TL]  
[RPT]  
[% -]  
[SCALE]  
[OPEN]  
[TARE]  
[CPN]  
[Chg]  
[VND CPN]  
[STR CPN]  
[RTN MDSE]  
[TX3/M], [TX4/M]  
[TAX], [EX]  
[PB] (or [PICK UP BAL])  
[CODE OPEN]  
[FS/M]  
[FS TL/TEND]  
[CARD No.]  
[GST/M]  
[GUEST NO.]  
[PRICE SHIFT 1] to  
[PRICE SHIFT 3]  
[MENU SHIFT 1] to  
[MENU SHIFT 3]  
[CLK 1] to [CLK 8]  
[CREDIT 1] to  
[CREDIT 4]  
[FUNCTION 5] to  
[FUNCTION 10]  
[GCP LINE #]  
– 21 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
9. FUNCTIONS OF EACH KEY  
This section briefly describes functions of each key for your quick reference purposes. See the reference  
pages in Section 10: REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT for detail operation sequences.  
TABLE OF KEY FUNCTIONS  
REFERENCE  
KEY  
FUNCTIONS  
PAGE  
LOG key. Used in case of Cashier Code Entry method, to  
declare start or end of normal operation by cashier. For  
details, refer to Section 7.1.  
14 ~ 16, 19  
LOG  
Receipt key. Used to change the receipt-ON/OFF mode.  
30  
RECEIPT  
Log/Receipt key. This is a dual-function key that has both  
[LOG] and [RECEIPT] functions.  
See pages for  
[LOG] and  
[RECEIPT]  
LOG  
RECEIPT  
ReceiptPost-issuekey. Usedtoissuethereceiptofasale  
when the sale has already finalized in the Receipt-OFF  
mode.  
RECEIPT  
ISSUE  
58  
Receipt Feed key. Used to advance the receipt roll and  
operated by holding it down until the paper has advanced to  
the required position.  
RF  
JF  
Journal Feed key. Used to advance the journal roll in the  
same fashion as the [RF] key is used to receipt roll.  
Numeric keys. Used to enter numeric values. Depressing  
the [00] key once is the same as depressing the [0] key  
twice consecutively. Depressing the [000] key once is the  
same as depressing the [0] key three times consecutively.  
The [.] key is used to designate the decimal point of a  
percentage rate or a quantity.  
7
4
1
8
5
2
9
6
3
0 00 •  
Department keys. Used to enter each item, serving for  
classifying merchandise by department.  
32 ~ 35, 38  
1
60  
to  
Department No. key. Used to access a department by  
designatingthedepartmentcode,insteadofdepressingthe  
specific Department key. With this key installed, a maxi-  
mum of 99 departments may be controlled.  
See pages for  
DP#  
[DEPT]  
PLU (Price-Look-Up) key. Used to enter a PLU that is  
linked to a department.  
PLU  
C
32 ~ 38  
Clear key. Used to clear numeric entries or a declaration  
key entry.  
- 22 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
REFERENCE  
KEY  
FUNCTIONS  
PAGE  
Non-add Number Print key. Used to print a non-add  
number (such as Customer No., Credit Card No., etc.) on  
the receipt and journal for future reference.  
46  
#
No-salekey. Usedtoopenthecashdrawerwithoutrelating  
a sale, and also used to display the store message.  
30, 31  
NS  
Amount key. Used to enter a manual amount of PLU item.  
And also used to enter an amount or price for an open  
department when the department is accessed by the [DP#]  
key.  
AMT  
32 ~ 36  
32 ~ 36  
48  
Preset Open key. Used to release a preset-price depart-  
ment or PLU items for a manual price entry.  
PR  
OPEN  
Listing Capacity Open key. Used to release the high or  
low amount limit preprogrammed on each department or  
PLU.  
LC  
OPEN  
Preset and Listing Capacity Open key. This is a dual-  
function key that has both [PR OPEN] and [LC OPEN]  
functions.  
See pages for  
[PR OPEN] and  
[LC OPEN]  
OPEN  
AT-FOR (Quantity Extension and Split Package Pric-  
ing) key. Used to multiply a department, PLU, or Bottle  
Return item entry by a quantity. Also used to auto-calculate  
and enter a split-package price.  
@/FOR  
34 ~ 36  
45  
Vendor Coupon key. Used to enter the amount of vendor  
coupons received from the customer.  
VND  
CPN  
Store Coupon key. Used to subtract a store coupon  
amount redeemed through a department.  
STR  
CPN  
45  
Returned Merchandise key. Used to refund money to a  
customer who has returned items already purchased.  
RTN  
MDSE  
43  
Bottle Return key. Used to enter a bottle return amount.  
BTL  
RTN  
43  
Dollar Discount key. Used to subtract an amount from the  
sale such as a discount during a sale.  
DOLL  
DISC  
44  
Percent Charge key. Used to add a percent rate to a sale.  
44  
% +  
- 23 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
REFERENCE  
KEY  
FUNCTIONS  
PAGE  
Percent Discount key. Used to subtract a percent rate  
from a sale.  
44  
% -  
Item Correct key. Used to remove the last item from the  
bill, printing a line through the item on the receipt and  
journal.  
ITEM  
CORR  
45  
46  
Void key. Used to delete an item entered previously  
(before the last item) in the current transaction.  
VOID  
All Void key. Used to cancel all the items entered in the  
current sale.  
ALL  
VOID  
46  
Received-on-Account key. Used to enter payments re-  
ceived on account, i.e. not relating to a sale. Also used for  
change reserve amounts loaned from the store.  
31, 55  
55, 5 (MG)  
R/A  
PO  
ST  
Paid-Outkey. Usedtorecordamountspaidoutofthecash  
drawer not relating to a sale. Also used for Pick Up  
operations, such as money collections for banking pur-  
poses.  
Subtotal key. Used to obtain subtotal of the current  
transaction.  
49  
49  
Taxable Total key. Used to obtain the taxable total (the  
sale total including taxes due) of the current transaction.  
TXBL  
TL  
Cash Amount Tendered /Cash Total key. Used to record  
all cash paid transactions and will be able to finalize a sale  
operation.  
51, 52  
51 ~ 53  
AT/TL  
Check key. This is one of non-cash media keys, and used  
to cash a check when the register is outside a sale, or to  
finalize the transaction as a check payment.  
CHK  
TND  
CHECK  
TEND  
or  
Charge key. This is another non-cash media key, and  
usually programmed as "Charge Sale Total" key. This key  
can also be used for payments in credit cards, if the [CARD  
No.] key is installed.  
See pages for  
[CHECK TEND]  
Chg  
Miscellaneous Media key. This is one of additional non-  
cash media keys that may be installed besides [CHK TND]  
and [Chg]. This key has the same functions and  
programmabilities as the[CHK TND]key, and usually used  
as Tender-only key.  
See pages for  
[CHECK TEND]  
MISC  
TEND  
MISC  
or  
- 24 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
REFERENCE  
KEY  
FUNCTIONS  
PAGE  
Media-coupon, Credit 1 to Credit 4 keys. These are  
additional non-cash media keys that may be installed  
besides those already described, according to the require-  
ments of each store.  
CPN  
See pages for  
[CHECK TEND]  
CREDIT  
1
CREDIT  
4
to  
Card No. key. Used to enter the code number (1 to 12)  
which classifies the credit card company followed by the  
sale finalization with the [Chg] key.  
CARD  
No.  
51  
61  
Validation key. Used to print a required item or finalizing  
a required sale on a validation slip.  
VALI  
DATE  
Check No. and Endorsement Print key. Used to print the  
endorsement data with or without a Check No. print after  
finalizing a sale with a non-cash media key.  
CHECK  
No.  
62  
Previous Balance key. Used for a previous balance entry.  
39, 40  
PB  
SI (Selective Itemizer) Total key. Used to display (and  
print) the selective itemizer contents.  
SI/TL  
or:  
50  
48  
SI1/TL  
SI1/M  
TX1/M  
SI2/TL  
SI (Selective Itemizer) Modifier key. Used to reverse the  
SI (Selective Itemizer) status programmed on each Depart-  
ment or PLU.  
SI/M  
or:  
SI2/M  
Tax Modifier key(s). Used to reverse the taxable/non-  
taxable status on departments, PLUs, or other tax-status  
programmable keys. Also used in Tax Exempt operations.  
TX/M  
or:  
48  
50  
TX4/M  
to  
Tax Exempt key. Used to declare the exemption of the  
taxes from the sale.  
EX  
- 25 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
REFERENCE  
KEY  
FUNCTIONS  
PAGE  
Salesperson key. Used to record sales contribution data  
of each salesperson for report purpose.  
SALES  
PERSON  
56  
Repeat key. Used to repeat a department or PLU item  
entry.  
33  
RPT  
Foreign Currency keys. Used in tendering or exchange  
with foreign currencies.  
CUR  
1
CUR  
5
53, 54  
to  
Scale key. This key is used for various scaled items. To  
enable to register weight data from the scale, only the  
DepartmentsprogrammedwiththeScale-Allowedstatusor  
the PLUs programmed with the Scale-Compulsory status  
may be operated.  
47  
SCALE  
Tare key. Used to enter the preset tare weight data prior to  
a scaled item entry, thus to subtract tare from the gross  
weight and obtain the net weight.  
TARE  
TAX  
48  
49  
51  
48  
ManualTaxkey. Usedtoenteranirregulartaxamountthat  
cannot be calculated on the basis of the programmed tax  
table, and to add it to the sale total.  
Food Stamp Total Read/Tender key. Used to read the  
FoodStampableportionamountofthesaleandtotenderan  
amount in Food Stamps.  
FSTL  
TEND  
Food Stamp Modifier key. Used to reverse the Food  
Stampable/Non-stampable status of a Department, PLU,  
andotherfunctionkeysprogrammablewithfood-stampable  
status.  
FS/M  
GST Modifier key. Used to reverse the GST taxable/Non-  
taxable status of Department, PLU, and other function keys  
programmable with GST tax status.  
48  
18  
GST/M  
Cashier 1 to Cashier 8 keys. Used to declare start or end  
of normal operation by cashier (instead of using [LOG/  
RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key).  
CLK 1  
CLK 8  
to  
to  
Function 1 to Function 10 keys. Used to execute a  
command of key string preprogrammed on each of these  
keys. An operation series of maximum 10 keys can be  
programmed on each key, thus eliminating time in daily  
operation routines.  
FUNCTION  
FUNCTION  
56  
1
10  
Each of these keys is programmed with a PLU Code. That  
is, depressing one of those keys is equal to entering a PLU  
Code then depressing the [PLU] key.  
See pages for  
PLU Preset-code Keys  
[PLU]  
- 26 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
REFERENCE  
KEY  
FUNCTIONS  
PAGE  
Total key. Used to finalize the sales entries and transfer all  
the balance.  
39 ~ 42  
TOTAL  
Tray Total key. Used to obtain the total of an individual  
guest tray in a guest party.  
TRAY  
TOTAL  
59  
57  
57  
40  
47  
60  
37  
37  
61  
41  
41  
Charge Tip key. Used to enter a tip amount for cashier.  
CHARGE  
TIP  
Tip Paid key. Used to enter a cash tip amount for cashier.  
TIP  
PAID  
GCP Line No. key. Used to enter the number of printed  
lines for accessing the appropriate position to print addi-  
tional data on a guest check.  
GCP  
LINE #  
Number-of-Guests key. Used to enter the number of  
guests.  
GUEST  
NO.  
Call No. key. Used to enter the call No. of order taking.  
CALL  
No.  
PLU Price Shift key. Used to shift the PLU code.  
PRICE  
PRICE  
SHIFT 1  
SHIFT 3  
to  
to  
PLU Menu Shift key. Used to designate the keyboard No.  
for Preset-code PLU.  
MENU  
SHIFT 1  
MENU  
SHIFT 3  
Recall key. Used to recall the order table.  
RECALL  
Pick Up Balance key. This key should be installed in place  
of the [PB] key if the Check Track feature is selected  
instead of the Manual PB Entry feature.  
PICK UP  
BAL  
Customer File Code Open key. This key should be  
installed if the Check Track feature is selected.  
CODE  
OPEN  
- 27 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
10. REGISTERING PROCEDURE AND PRINT FORMAT  
Before starting sale entries, read through the following instructions:  
WARNING!  
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.  
TRAINING MODE is available:  
If you are a beginner in operating this register, ask the store manager for practicing in the TRAIN-  
ING MODE.  
During your operations, the following may occur:  
•
Errors ...  
A tone continuously sounds and an error message appears in the upper row of the Operator  
Display panel. The keys on the keyboard are locked. In this case, read the Error Message  
(refer to the ERROR MESSAGE TABLE, Section 5.1), and depress the [C] key to cancel the  
error status. Then remove the cause of the error and perform the operation again.  
•
Manager Intervention is required ...  
When Error Message "MANAGER REQUIRED" (standard setting; programmable) is dis-  
played, it means that the last key or operation requires a manager Intervention.  
Depress the [C] key to cancel the error status, and call the manager for intervention.  
When the manager comes to intervene with an appropriate key, you may perform the opera-  
tion again. If you are informed which keys and operations will require Manager Intervention,  
you can call the manager in advance before the error occurs.  
•
•
Other errors requiring Manager Intervention ...  
When an error occurs and you cannot think of the cause or the same error occurs again, call  
your manager.  
Receipt or Journal Paper-End is detected ...  
When an error tone sounds (without an error message) and the "AMOUNT" portion of the  
display is flickering, the receipt or journal roll is about to end. In this case, the error cannot be  
canceled by the [C] key. Replace the paper roll with a new one, referring to the paper install-  
ing/removing operations in Chapter 15 and Chapter 6.  
•
Printer Motor-Lock Condition is detected ...  
If "Error" is indicated in the lower row of the display panel ("AMOUNT" portion), the Printer  
Motor is locked due to paper jam, etc. Turn the Power Switch to OFF, and remove the cause  
of the motor-lock. Refer to Chapters 12 and 13.  
CONDITION SETTING TO START TRANSACTION ENTRIES  
Mode Lock: Insert the "REG" key and set it to the "REG" position.  
- 28 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Cashier Sign-ON or Cashier Key to ON status:  
If the [LOG/RECEIPT] (or [LOG]) key is installed, you must sign-ON or sign-IN. (See  
Section 7.1.)  
If Cashier Keys or Cashier Locks are installed, you must set your cashier key to the ON  
status. (See Section 7.2. and 7.3.)  
Now you are ready for sale entries.  
On the following pages are patterns of entering operations, and receipt or journal print format samples  
due to the operations. In the operation sequence patterns, "| |" indicates an input through the numeric  
keys, "[  
]" indicates a depression of the function key, and "---" indicates other registering and/or  
finalizing operations.  
Please note that these are merely sample operations. Especially, the receipt or journal print indications  
merely show the standard print format. The actual print format and contents may vary on your machine  
in accordance with the differences in specification, program selections, etc.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
OPERATION  
PAGE  
OPERATION  
PAGE  
RECEIPT-ISSUE/NON-ISSUE SELECTION ...................... 30  
STORE MESSAGE DISPLAY............................................. 30  
NO-SALE ............................................................................ 31  
LOAN .................................................................................. 31  
DEPARTMENT ENTRY ...................................................... 32  
PLU ENTRY ........................................................................ 32  
SET MENU ENTRY ............................................................ 32  
MODIFIER PLU ENTRY ..................................................... 33  
REPEAT ENTRY ................................................................ 33  
SUBTOTAL READ .............................................................. 49  
TAXABLE TOTAL READ .................................................... 49  
TAXABLE TOTAL READ and SUBTOTAL PRINT ............. 49  
SELECTIVE ITEMIZER TOTAL READ ............................... 50  
TAX CALCULATION AND PRINT ...................................... 50  
TAX EXEMPTION ............................................................... 50  
FOOD STAMPABLE TOTAL READ  
FOOD STAMP TENDERING .......................................... 51  
SALE FINALIZATION BY MEDIA KEYS ............................. 51  
MULTI-TENDERING ........................................................... 52  
SPLIT TENDERING ............................................................ 52  
CHECK CASHING .............................................................. 53  
SALE PAID IN FOREIGN CURRENCIES ........................... 53  
QUANTITY EXTENSION (MULTIPLICATION)  
for DEPTs/PLUs.............................................................. 34  
SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING................................................ 35  
PLU PRICE SHIFT ENTRY ................................................ 37  
PLU MENU SHIFT ENTRY ................................................. 37  
SINGLE-ITEM DEPARTMENT/PLU ENTRY ...................... 38  
OTHER INCOME DEPARTMENT/PLU ENTRY ................. 38  
ORDER ENTRY, PREVIOUS BALANCE ENTRY .............. 39  
ADDITIONAL ORDER ENTRY ........................................... 40  
NO-SALE EXCHANGE from Foreign Currency  
to Domestic Currency ..................................................... 54  
NO-SALE EXCHANGE from Domestic Currency  
to Foreign Currency ........................................................ 54  
RECEIVED-ON-ACCOUNT ................................................ 55  
PAID-OUT ........................................................................... 55  
SALESPERSON ENTRY .................................................... 56  
FUNCTION KEY ENTRY .................................................... 56  
TIP PAID ............................................................................. 57  
CHARGE TIP ...................................................................... 57  
RECEIPT POST-ISSUE ...................................................... 58  
TRAY TOTAL ...................................................................... 59  
EAT-IN/TAKEOUT ENTRY ................................................. 59  
CALL NO. ENTRY .............................................................. 60  
DRIVE-THROUGH ENTRY ................................................ 60  
RECALL ENTRY ................................................................. 61  
VALIDATION PRINT ........................................................... 61  
ENDORSEMENT PRINT .................................................... 62  
GUEST CHECK PRINTER OPERATION ........................... 63  
WHEN A POWER FAILURE OCCURS .............................. 64  
ORDER ENTRY, CHECK TRACK ENTRY  
(CUSTOMER FILE TYPE) .............................................. 41  
RETURNED MERCHANDISE ............................................ 43  
BOTTLE RETURN .............................................................. 43  
DOLLAR DISCOUNT .......................................................... 44  
PERCENT DISCOUNT, PERCENT CHARGE ................... 44  
STORE COUPON ............................................................... 45  
VENDOR COUPON ............................................................ 45  
ITEM CORRECT................................................................. 45  
VOID ................................................................................... 46  
ALL VOID ............................................................................ 46  
NON-ADD NUMBER PRINT ............................................... 46  
NUMBER-OF-GUESTS ENTRY ......................................... 47  
SCALE ENTRY ................................................................... 47  
LISTING CAPACITY OPEN ................................................ 48  
SELECTIVE ITEMIZER STATUS MODIFICATION ............ 48  
TAX STATUS or FOOD STAMP STATUS  
MODIFICATION .............................................................. 48  
MANUAL TAX ENTRY ........................................................ 49  
- 29 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
RECEIPT-ISSUE/NON-ISSUE SELECTION  
Receipts are issued or not issued according to the “R OFF” lamp illuminated/extinguished status on the  
Operator Display panel.  
“R OFF” (Receipt OFF) lamp Status Change Operations ([LOG/RECEIPT] = [RECEIPT])  
Mode Lock may be  
in any position  
[LOG/RECEIPT]  
Extinguished  
Illuminated  
[LOG/RECEIPT]  
Receipt ON  
Status  
Receipt OFF  
Status  
NOTES: 1. The“ROFF”lampstatusatthestartingofatransactionentrydecideswhetherareceipt  
will be issued for the transaction or not. Switching the Receipt ON/OFF status during  
a transaction will not be effective.  
2. If a transaction entered with the “R OFF” lamp illuminated and finalized but a receipt  
is required, the [RECEIPT ISSUE] (Post-issue Receipt) key can be operated to issue  
a receipt.  
3. Simply depress the [LOG/RECEIPT] key without a numeric entry. If the key is  
depressed with a prior numeric entry in REG mode, it may turn out to be a Sign ON or  
Sign OFF operation (in case of Cashier Code Entry Method).  
STORE MESSAGE DISPLAY  
This operation designates one of the four messages programmed to display in REG or MGR mode when  
no entries are under way on the register.  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
OPERATION  
| Display Message Code |  
[NS]  
1 to 4  
(corresponding to Line  
No. 1 to 4 in  
programming)  
NOTE: This operation is effective when program options “Display Message method 16 CHARACTERS  
HELD” and “Display Message DISPLAY in REG and MGR mode (as well as in LOCK mode)” are  
both selected. Display selection in LOCK mode also depends on the line designated in this  
operation.  
- 30 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
NO-SALE  
The no-sale transaction is used to open the cash drawer without relating to any sales, such as for giving  
change, testing the receipt/journal print condition, etc.  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
[NS]........The drawer opens and a No-sale receipt is issued.  
OPERATION  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TEC STORE  
Max. 4 lines of Store  
Name/Message (a rubber  
stamp may replace it)  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Max. 3 lines of Commercial Message  
Date (Month-Day-Year order in this sample)  
Day-of-Week  
Register No.  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
No-sale Receipt Header  
Current Time  
*
N O S A L E  
*
Consecutive No.  
Name of the Cashier who  
is operating the register.  
JONES  
0085 15:59TM  
NOTE: The print format samples in this manual are not copies of actual receipts printed on an ECR  
but are merely indications of print formats. In those format samples, the bold-face  
characters indicate Double-sized Characters on actual receipts issued by the ECR. Also  
note that each Double-sized Character on actual receipts will be printed at the position half-  
character space rightward more than in the print format samples in this manual.  
LOAN  
This operation is used to record the cash amounts and food stamps loaned from the store as the change  
reserve in the drawer.  
OPERATION  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
[R/A]  
| Cash Amount Loaned | [AT/TL]  
([ST])  
[AT/TL]  
| Food Stamp Amount Loaned | [FSTL TEND]  
To read the loan total  
so far enterd.  
Repeatable to add up amounts.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Loan Receipt Header  
*
L O A N  
*
CASH  
CASH  
CASH  
SUBTL  
TOTAL  
$20.00  
$10.00  
$35.00  
$65.00  
Amounts loaned  
Total amount loaned  
$ 6 5 . 0 0  
JONES  
0095 15:59TM  
- 31 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DEPARTMENT ENTRY  
Each department is preprogrammed as the “PRESET” type (with a price programmed) or “OPEN” type (with  
no price programmed). Perform operation depending on the type selected.  
OPERATION  
Open Department Type  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
•
•
| Price | [Open DEPT]  
| Open-Dept Code | [DP#] | Price | [AMT]  
VEGETABLE  
$1.00TF  
T: Taxable Item Symbol  
Preset Department Type  
F: Food Stampable or GST  
Taxable Item Symbol  
•
•
[Preset DEPT]  
| Dept Code | [DP#]  
D P 13  
$1.40  
Preset-price Open through Preset Department Type  
•
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Price | [Preset DEPT]  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Dept Code | [DP#] | Price | [AMT]  
D P 13  
$1.00  
PLU ENTRY  
Each PLU is preprogrammed as the “PRESET” type (with a price preset) or “OPEN” type (with no price  
preset). Perform operation depending on the type selected.  
OPERATION  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Open PLU Type  
Potato Chips  
Cheese  
$1.50T  
•
•
| Open-PLU Code | [PLU] | Price | [AMT]  
| Price | [PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU  
Preset PLU Type  
$2.50TF  
•
•
| Preset-PLU Code | [PLU]  
[PLU Preset-Code Key] of Preset-PLU  
Preset-price Open Entry through Preset PLU Type  
•
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Preset-PLU code | [PLU] | Price | [AMT]  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Price | [PLU Preset-Code Key]  
Hard Rolls-4  
$0.80TF  
SET MENU ENTRY  
A maximum of 30 Set Menu Tables are programmable. In one table, a maximum of 8 Menu Items can be  
set. By entering the main menu, the sub menu are automatically entered.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
OPERATION  
Beef Stk Set  
Veget. Salad›  
Corn Soup›  
Coffee›  
$14.50T  
Same operations as PLU Entry.  
Sub Menu Mark  
- 32 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
MODIFIER PLU ENTRY  
Some PLUs can be programmed as “MODIFIER” descriptors (such as “PEPPER”, “RARE”, “MEDIUM” for  
grilling a steak item, and toppings for dishes, etc.)  
OPERATION  
•
•
When entering a Modifier PLU only  
Same operations as PLU Entry  
When entering a Modifier PLU after a PLU which has the compulsory status of Modifier PLU Entry  
Entry of PLU which has the  
Modifier PLU Entry  
....  
compulsory status of modifier  
PLU entry  
(compulsory)  
NOTES: 1. When Returned Merchandise or Void operation is executed for a PLU which has the  
compulsory status of modifier PLU entry, the modifier PLU entry is unnecessary.  
2. Price entry for a Modifier PLU of open price type cannot be allowed. An error results when  
depressing the [AMT] key.  
3. %, Dollar Discount and Vendor Coupon operations cannot be executed to a modifier PLU  
itself.  
REPEAT ENTRY  
To repeat the same item of the last entry, simply depress the last key of the department or PLU entry  
sequence or depress the [RPT] key.  
OPERATION  
(1) Department Repeat  
Open Department Type  
•
•
| Price | [Open DEPT] [Same DEPT] (or [RPT])  
| Open-Dept Code | [DP#] | Price | [AMT] [AMT] (or [RPT])  
Preset Department Type  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
•
•
[Preset DEPT] [Same DEPT] (or [RPT])  
| Preset-Dept Code | [DP#] [DP#] (or [RPT])  
VEGETABLE  
VEGETABLE  
$1.20TF  
$1.20TF  
Preset-price Open Repeat  
•
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Price | [Preset DEPT] [RPT]  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Preset-Dept Code | [DP#] | Price | [AMT] [RPT]  
(2) PLU Repeat  
Open PLU Type  
•
•
| Open-PLU Code | [PLU] | Price | [AMT] [AMT] (or [RPT])  
| Price | [PLU Preset-Code key] [Same key] (or [RPT])  
- 33 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Preset PLU Type  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
•
•
| Preset-PLU Code | [PLU] [PLU] (or [RPT])  
[PLU Preset-Code key] [Same key] (or [RPT])  
Hard Rolls-4  
Hard Rolls-4  
£0,70TF  
£0,70TF  
Preset-price Open Repeat  
•
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Preset-PLU Code | [PLU] | Price | [AMT] [RPT]  
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Price | [PLU Preset-Code key] [RPT]  
NOTES: 1. Ifthefirstitemofthoserepeatedismodifiedwith[SI/M], [LCOPEN], [FS/M],[TX/M],or[GST/  
M], the modified status will be effective through the last item of the repeated.  
2. Please note that the Preset-price Open Repeat using a [Preset DEPT] key or a [PLU Preset-  
Code Key] can only be repeated by the [RPT] key.  
3. An Other Income Department/PLU cannot be repeated. Neither can any Set Menu PLU be  
repeated.  
4. Repeat Entry cannot be executed during the compulsory status of modifier PLU entry.  
QUANTITY EXTENSION (MULTIPLICATION) FOR DEPTs/PLUs  
OPERATION  
(1) Department Multiplication  
Open Department Type  
•
•
| Quantity | [@/FOR] | Price | [Open DEPT]  
| Quantity | [@/FOR] | Open-Dept Code | [DP#] | Price | [AMT]  
Preset Department Type  
•
•
| Quantity | [@/FOR] [Preset DEPT]  
| Quantity | [@/FOR] | Preset-Dept Code | [DP#]  
Preset-price Open Type  
•
•
| Quantity | [@/FOR] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Price | [Preset DEPT]  
| Quantity | [@/FOR] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Preset-Dept Code | [DP#] | Price | [AMT]  
(2) PLU Multiplication  
Open PLU Type  
•
•
| Open-PLU Code | [PLU] | Quantity | [@/FOR] | Price | [AMT]  
| Quantity | [@/FOR] | Price | [PLU Preset-Code key] of Open-PLU  
Preset PLU Type  
•
•
| Quantity | [@/FOR] | Preset-PLU Code | [PLU]  
| Quantity | [@/FOR] [PLU Preset-Code key] of Preset-PLU  
Preset-price Open Type  
•
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Preset-PLU Code | [PLU] | Quantity | [@/FOR] | Price | [AMT]  
| Quantity | [@/FOR] [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN]) | Price | [PLU Preset-Code key] of Preset-PLU  
– 34 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
NOTES: 1. Quantity ................ Max. 3 integral + 3 decimal digits  
(Use the [ . ] key for entering decimal  
digits.)  
5X 1.30@  
6X 0.45@  
DAIRY  
$6.50TF  
$2.70TF  
Price (Unit Price)... Max. 6 digits  
(5 digits for Preset Point Feature)  
BAKERY  
Product ................. Must not exceed 8 digits.  
2. When the Quantity is 1-digit integer (1 to 9) followed by a Code-preset Department/PLU key  
with a price preset, the [@/FOR] key is omissible.  
3. The product obtained by multiplication cannot be repeated.  
4. The decimal portion of the Quantity entry itself is processed down to the two digits below the  
decimal point. The fraction rounding in this case is fixed to ROUND OFF.  
5. You can select the rounding process of the fractions of the product (result of multiplication)  
by a program option: ROUND OFF (initial setting), ROUND UP, or ROUND DOWN.  
SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING ("Q'ty" = Quantity... in the patterns listed below)  
OPERATION  
(1) Department  
Open Department  
•
| Purchased Q'ty | [@/FOR] | Whole Package Q'ty | [@/FOR]  
| Whole Package Price | [Open Dept]  
| Open-Dept Code | [DP#] | Whole Package Price | [AMT]  
Preset Department  
•
| Purchased Q'ty | [@/FOR] | Whole Package Q'ty | [@/FOR]  
[Preset Dept]  
| Preset-Dept Code | [DP#]  
Preset-price Open  
•
[PR OPEN] (or [OPEN])  
| Purchased Q'ty | [@/FOR] | Whole Package Q'ty | [@/FOR]  
| Whole Package Price | [Preset Dept]  
| Preset-Dept Code | [DP#] | Whole Package Price | [AMT]  
– 35 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
(2) PLU  
Open PLU  
• | Purchased Q'ty | [@/FOR]  
| Split-Price Type PLU Code | [PLU]  
of open-price PLU  
NOTE 1 below  
| Whole Package Price | [AMT]  
| Whole Package Price | [PLU Preset-code Key]  
of open-price PLU and Split-Price Type  
Preset PLU  
• | Purchased Q'ty | [@/FOR]  
| Split-Price Type PLU Code | [PLU]  
of preset-price PLU  
NOTE 1 below  
[PLU Preset-code Key]  
of preset-price PLU and Split-Price Type  
Preset-Price Open  
• [PR OPEN] (or [OPEN])  
| Purchased Q'ty | [@/FOR]  
| Split-Price Type PLU Code | [PLU]  
of preset-price PLU  
NOTE 1 below  
| Whole Package Price | [AMT]  
| Whole Package Price | [PLU Preset-code Key]  
of preset-price PLU and Split-Price Type  
NOTES: 1. When this portion is omitted, the "Purchased Q'ty" value  
is regarded as "1" (i.e. one individual item but not the  
whole package quantity.)  
Whole  
Package Package  
Price  
Whole  
Purchased  
Quantity  
Quantity  
2. Purchased Quantity ............ max. 3 digits integral only  
Whole Package Quantity .... max. 3 digits integral only  
Whole Package Price ......... max. 6 digits  
2x4.00/5  
Cheese  
$1.60TF  
Item Name  
Purchased  
Amount  
3. One of two fraction rounding methods can be selected for  
the Split Package Pricing calculations -- Round Up  
PRODUCT (initial setting) or Round Up UNIT PRICE.  
– 36 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU PRICE SHIFT ENTRY  
This operation is to register the PLU code which is added 1, 2, or 3 to the code of the entered PLU.  
OPERATION  
•
•
•
•
[PRICE SHIFT 1]  
[PRICE SHIFT 2]  
[PRICE SHIFT 3]  
[PR OPEN]  
[PLU] (PLU code plus 1)  
[PLU] (PLU code plus 2)  
[PLU] (PLU code plus 3)  
[PRICE SHIFT 1 ~ 3] | PLU Code | [PLU] | Price | [AMT]  
NOTES: 1. Error results when some operation other than PLU Price Shift entry is attempted after  
depressing the [PRICE SHIFT] key.  
2. Repeat entry after depressing the [PRICE SHIFT] key is unavailable.  
3. Program option allows an ECR to display PLU Price Shift No. together with PLU Menu No.  
instead of a department code.  
PLU MENU SHIFT ENTRY  
Max. 3 PLUs can be programmed on the respective PLU Preset-code keys of the flat keyboard.  
This operation designates the keyboard phase No.  
OPERATION  
•
•
•
[MENU SHIFT 1]  
[MENU SHIFT 2]  
[MENU SHIFT 3]  
[PLU] (PLU on keyboard phase No. 1)  
[PLU] (PLU on keyboard phase No. 2)  
[PLU] (PLU on keyboard phase No. 3)  
NOTES: 1. After one PLU Menu Shift entry, the keyboard phase No. is automatically returned to the  
phase No. 1. However, the keyboard phase No. "Hold" spec. can be programmed by  
program option.  
In this case, the keyboard phase No. can be shifted by the [MENU SHIFT] key only.  
2. Program option allows an ECR to display PLU Menu No. together with PLU Price Shift No.  
instead of a department code.  
– 37 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
SINGLE-ITEM DEPARTMENT or SINGLE-ITEM PLU ENTRY  
If a department (or PLU) is programmed as Single-item, the department (or PLU) entry sequence will  
immediately finalizes the sale as cash sale when operated outside a sale.  
-- Single-item Receipt Print Format --  
OPERATION  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Same as  
DEPARTMENT ENTRY  
PLU ENTRY  
QUANTITY EXTENSION  
SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING  
SET MENU ENTRY  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
NOTES: 1. If operated inside a sale, it functions just as an  
D P 14  
CASH  
$2.10  
$ 2 . 1 0  
ordinary itemized department or PLU.  
2. When adopting the Drive-through feature together  
with the compulsory print feature of the Guest  
Check Printer, the single-item entry cannot be  
executed.  
ITEM  
JONES  
1
0108 16:27TM  
OTHER INCOME DEPARTMENT ENTRY, OTHER INCOME PLU ENTRY  
This operation is used to enter items which do not directly become sales for the store, such as lottery,  
postage, gift wrapping fee, size adjustment fee, utility (payment of electricity and gas), and donation.  
OPERATION  
Same as DEPARTMENT ENTRY sequence using the Department Key which is programmed as an  
OTHER INCOME department. When a PLU is used for this purpose, the PLU must be programmed  
to link to a department with Other Income status.  
– 38 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ORDER ENTRY, PREVIOUS BALANCE ENTRY  
OPERATION  
[PB] (for a new order entry)  
menu item entries  
Sale Finalization by Media Keys  
[TOTAL]...to transfer all the balance  
•
Timing of a slip insertion into the Guest Check Printer  
1) Before depressing the [PB] key  
When selecting the option “Guest Check Print Compulsory for PB or Check Track entry”, the Guest  
Check Printer begins printing after feeding the preprogrammed line Nos. by depressing the [PB]  
key. The Guest Check Printer prints data every time one menu item is entered.  
2) Between menu item entries and sale finalization ([TOTAL])  
When selecting the option “Guest Check Print Compulsory for PB or Check Track entry”, the Guest  
Check Printer begins printing after feeding the preprogrammed line Nos. by sale finalization  
including the [TOTAL] key.  
The Guest Check Printer prints all the data entered. If a guest check slip has not been inserted into  
the Guest Check Printer, an error results when finalizing a sale or depressing the [TOTAL] key.  
•
Timing of data output to the Remote Kitchen Printer  
1) Data Buffering Type  
The Remote Kitchen Printer prints all the data entered when depressing the [TOTAL] key, the  
[TXBL TL] key or the media keys.  
2) Send on the Fly Type  
The Remote Kitchen Printer prints data every time one menu item is entered. However, if the  
transmission to the Remote Kitchen Printer is interrupted due to abnormality of the Remote Kitchen  
Printer during a menu item entry, the timing control of data output to the Remote Kitchen Printer is  
changed to that of the data buffering type described above in one sales entry.  
In the next sales entry, if the abnormality of the Remote Kitchen Printer has been removed, the  
original control method regains.  
NOTES: 1. Previous Balance Entry can be executed even when a slip has not been inserted into the  
Guest Check Printer by a program option.  
2. Previous Balance Entry can be canceled. To end the entry, follow the procedure de-  
scribed below.  
[PB]  
[ITEM CORR]  
[ALL VOID]  
[AT/TL] (or other media)  
[ITEM CORR]  
3. Previous Balance Entry is unavailable when the drive-through option or the check track  
feature is selected.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
-- Guest Check --  
P B +  
$0.00  
$7.50T  
$2.20T  
$2.50T  
$0.73  
Hamb. Steak  
Veget. Salad  
Coffee  
TAX1  
P B +  
$0.00  
$7.50T  
$2.20T  
$2.50T  
$0.73  
$0.13  
Hamb. Steak  
Veget. Salad  
Coffee  
TAX2  
CASH  
$0.13  
$ 1 3 . 0 6  
TAX1  
TAX2  
CASH  
ITEM  
$
1 3 . 0 6  
3
ITEM  
JONES  
3
12-12-94 #111101  
1CL0021 1130 13:48TM  
0021 13:48TM  
– 39 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ADDITIONAL ORDER ENTRY  
Omissible; NOTE 2 below  
| Number of Lines to be fed | [GCP LINE#]  
| Previous Balance | [PB]  
menu item entries, if any  
Sale Finalization  
[TOTAL] ...to transfer all the balance  
NOTES: 1. Previous Balance Entry can be executed even when a slip has not been inserted into the  
Guest Check Printer by a program option.  
2. When omitting the designation of the number of lines to be fed, lines will be fed with the  
preprogrammedvalue. Whendesignatingthenumberoflinestobefed, thespecifiednumber  
of lines to be fed should not exceed the preprogrammed maximum number of lines to be  
printed. For example, when 10 is input, the program feeds 10 lines and starts printing on the  
11th line.  
3. As for the timing of a slip insertion into the Guest Check Printer and the timing of data output  
to the Remote Kitchen Printer, refer to the description on the preceding page.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Order Entry  
P B +  
$0.00  
2x 14.50@  
Beef Stk Set  
Veget. Salad  
$29.00T  
↑
Corn Soup  
↑
-- Guest Check --  
Coffee  
TAX1  
↑
$1.74  
$ 3 0 . 7 4  
P B +  
$0.00  
TOTAL  
2X 14.50@  
Beef Stk Set  
Veget. Salad↑  
Corn Soup↑  
Coffee↑  
$29.00T  
ITEM  
2
JONES  
0022 13:51TM  
TAX1  
$1.74  
TOTAL  
ITEM  
$30.74  
Additional Order  
13 12-19-94 #111101  
P B +  
1CL0021 1130 13:51TM  
$30.74  
2.00@  
$4.00T  
$34.74  
1CL0021 1130 13:51TM  
2X  
P B +  
$30.74  
2.00@  
Ice Cream  
CASH  
20 12-19-94 #111101  
2X  
Ice Cream  
CASH  
$4.00T  
$ 3 4 . 7 4  
ITEM  
JONES  
2
0023 13:56TM  
– 40 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ORDER ENTRY, CHECK TRACK ENTRY (CUSTOMER FILE TYPE)  
This operation is available only when the check track feature is selected.  
OPERATION  
(1) To initiate charge posting for a new customer  
| Customer File Code | [PICK UP BAL]  
(Must be one of those already  
Follow the line marked with "*"  
in Operation 2 below.  
opened in the “SET” mode and  
its balance must be zero.)  
| New Customer File Code | [CODE OPEN]  
(any 1 to 12-digit code not yet opened in the “SET” mode) ... (The use of [CODE OPEN] may  
require a manager Intervention.)  
(2) Charge posting with a previous balance first entered (pre-select) with or without Payment  
*
| Customer File Code | [PICK UP BAL]  
menu item entries, if any.  
([TXBL TL])  
[Chg]  
Displays the sale total excluding  
the previous balance.  
Finalizes the current sale, displays the entire  
sale total including the previous balance.  
[TOTAL] ......... To transfer all the balance as a new balance (i.e. no payment for this  
occasion). The prior [Chg] key may be omitted in this case.  
**  
| Amount Paid for this occasion | [R/A]  
Media Key operations  
(Same as media key operations for  
RECEIVED-ON-ACCOUNT payment  
finalization described later.)  
(The amount to be paid, partially or  
entirely, for this occasion. An  
excessive amount may be entered, in  
which case a debit balance will result.)  
Repeatable if necessary.  
[PO] ................ when the balance is negative (debit balance) and must be paid back to  
the customer in cash now.  
** Received-on-account operation can be programmed to be omissible by a program option  
when a customer pays all account balance.  
(3) Charge posting with a previous balance entered during a sale (post-select)  
A previous balance recalled through [PICK UP BAL] (or a zero balance by [PICK UP BAL] or [CODE  
OPEN]) may be entered not only before sale items but also after or between them if the [Chg] key has  
not been depressed. But, this operation is allowed only once in a sale.  
(4) Percent rate addition to a previous balance  
| Customer File Code | [PICK UP BAL]  
(| Rate |) [%+]  
---  
NOTES: 1. The [%-] key operates the same for percent discounting.  
2. When the balance recalled is negative (debit balance), neither % + nor %- can be  
operated.  
– 41 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Charge Posting Operation Sample  
OPERATION CONTENTS  
KEY OPERATION  
DISPLAY (Lower Row)  
Mr. JAMES HAILY comes  
and you start charge  
posting for him.  
1 [PICK UP BAL]  
0. 0 0  
Menu Items:  
$1.20 Dept. 1  
$3.50 Dept. 3  
120 [DEPT 1]  
350 [DEPT 3]  
([Chg])  
0 1  
0 3  
1. 2 0  
3. 5 0  
4. 9 8  
4. 9 8  
Finalize this sale.  
To transfer all the balance  
without payment.  
[TOTAL]  
(See Receipt 1 below.)  
Mr. JAMES HAILY now  
comes to pay all his  
account balance.  
1 [PICK UP BAL]  
[Chg]  
4. 9 8  
4. 9 8  
4. 9 8  
5. 0 2  
He tenders $10.00 in cash.  
498 [R/A]  
The balance is now zero  
due to the payment.  
1000 [AT/TL]  
(See Receipt 2 below.)  
Give the change to the  
customer in cash.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Receipt 2  
Receipt 1  
Customer File Code P B +  
000000000001  
P B +  
JAMES HAILY  
000000000001  
$4.98  
Customer's Name  
Balance  
JAMES HAILY  
➤
$0.00  
FRUIT  
MEAT  
TAX1  
$1.20TF  
$3.50TF  
$0.28TF  
$4.9 8  
Chg  
R/A  
CATEND  
CHANGE  
$4.9 8  
$4.98  
$10.00  
$5.02  
Chg  
TOTAL  
$4.9 8  
TOTAL  
$0 .0 0  
ITEM  
JONES  
2
ITEM  
JONES  
0
0052 15:12TM  
0053 15:15TM  
– 42 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
RETURNED MERCHANDISE  
OPERATION  
DEPARTMENT ENTRY  
PLU ENTRY  
QUANTITY EXTENSION  
SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING  
SET MENU ENTRY  
[RTN MDSE]  
---  
SINGLE-ITEM DEPARTMENT/PLU ENTRY  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
RTN  
BAKERY  
RTN  
-1.45TF  
-0.45TF  
CAN FOOD  
BOTTLE RETURN  
OPERATION  
| Bottle Return Amount | [BTL RTN]  
| Quantity | [@/FOR] | Unit Amount | [BTL RTN]  
max. 3 digit (integral value only)  
NOTE:  
•
Must not exceed the sale total amount. .... unless “Credit Balance” option is selected.  
(See REMARKS below.)  
REMARKS: In using the [BTL RTN] key when the “Credit Balance”  
option is not selected:  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Bottle Return entry after a Department or PLU item  
The bottle return amount must not exceed the preceding  
Department or PLU item amount.  
BTR  
-0.05  
Bottle Return entry after a subtotal  
The bottle return amount must not exceed the subtotal  
amount.  
6X  
0.05@  
-0.30  
BTR  
(Operating the [BTL RTN] key after any other item ([%+], [%-], etc.)  
than those above, an error will result.)  
– 43 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DOLLAR DISCOUNT  
OPERATION  
---  
---  
Dept or PLU item entry  
(for discount from an  
individual item)  
| Amount | [DOLL DISC]  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
[ST]  
(for discount from the sale  
total)  
VEGETABLE  
DISC  
$1.00  
-0.50  
SUBTL  
DISC  
$21.00  
-1.00  
NOTES: 1. The discount amount must not exceed the item amount or the subtotal unless the “Credit  
Balance” option is selected.  
2. A discount entry causes an error if operated during the compulsory status of modifier PLU  
entry or operated to modifier PLU item itself.  
PERCENT DISCOUNT, PERCENT CHARGE (SERVICE CHARGE)  
OPERATION  
(1) Percent Discount  
Dept or PLU entry  
[%-]  
Check Track entry of Credit Balance  
[ST]  
| Rate | [%-]  
(2) Percent Charge (Service Charge)  
Dept or PLU entry  
[%+]  
(Item Percent Charge)  
[ST]  
| Rate | [%+]  
(Service Charge)  
NOTES: 1. Rate ......... 0.001 to 99.999 (%)  
2. When the Dept or PLU item entry is modified with [RTN MDSE] or [VOID], the following %  
entry will also be modified with [RTN MDSE] or [VOID].  
3. No % + entry is allowed immediately after the input of a PB amount.  
4. A % entry will cause an error if operated after an Other Income Department/PLU.  
5. A % entry will cause an error if operated during the compulsory status of modifier PLU entry  
or operated to modifier PLU item itself.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
FISH  
%-  
$3.40TF  
-0.17T  
SUBTL  
%-  
$6.00  
-0.60  
5%  
10%  
– 44 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
STORE COUPON  
OPERATION  
[STR CPN]  
Follow  
DEPARTMENT ENTRY  
QUANTITY EXTENSION for DEPTs  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
NOTE: The store coupon amount to be entered must not exceed  
S. CPN  
CAN FOOD  
thesaletotalunlessthe“CreditBalance”optionisselected.  
-0.50TF  
VENDOR COUPON  
OPERATION  
---  
---  
([ST])  
| Coupon Amount | [VND CPN]  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
NOTE: The coupon amount to be entered must not exceed the  
V. CPN  
-4.00TF  
sale total unless the “Credit Balance” option is selected.  
ITEM CORRECT  
OPERATION  
DEPARTMENT ENTRY  
[ITEM CORR]  
PLU ENTRY  
REPEAT ENTRY  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
QUANTITY EXTENSION  
SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING  
RETURNED MERCHANDISE  
BOTTLE RETURN of Inside-Sale Type  
DOLLAR DISCOUNT  
PERCENT CHARGE/DISCOUNT  
STORE COUPON  
VENDOR COUPON  
CAN FOOD  
$1.00TF  
--------------------  
NOTES:  
1. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed after a Repeat  
Entry, only the last item of those repeated will be  
deleted.  
RECEIVED-ON-ACCOUNT Item  
PAID-OUT Item  
MANUAL TAX  
2. When[ITEMCORR]isdepressedafteraQuantity  
Extension entry, the entire product (result of  
multiplication) will be deleted.  
3. When [ITEM CORR] is depressed during the  
compulsory status of modifier PLU entry, the PLU  
with the compulsory status is deleted and the  
status itself is also canceled.  
4. When[ITEMCORR]isdepressedafteramodifier  
PLU entry, the modifier PLU item is deleted and  
the compulsory status regains.  
– 45 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
VOID  
The VOID operation is used to delete an item already entered before the last item within the current  
sale. Such items cannot be deleted by the [ITEM CORR] key any longer.  
OPERATION  
---  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
[VOID]  
DEPARTMENT ENTRY  
PLU ENTRY  
---  
QUANTITY EXTENSION  
SPLIT PACKAGE PRICING  
SET MENU ENTRY  
VEGETABLE  
FRUIT  
VOID  
$1.00TF  
$1.50TF  
voids  
Void Entry  
VEGETABLE  
-1.00TF  
NOTE: An amount exceeding the sale total cannot be entered unless the “Credit Balance” option is  
selected.  
ALL VOID  
When the current transaction being entered is found to be canceled before finalizing it, ALL VOID can  
be operated to delete all the items entered in the transaction.  
OPERATION  
Sale Item Entries  
[ALL VOID]  
[ITEM CORR] to execute ALL VOID  
[C] to cancel ALL VOID  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
NOTES: 1. All Void is possible if the current transaction contains  
less than 30 items.  
2. All Void cannot be operated after an [EX] entry, or  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
during Received-on-Account or Paid Out transactions.  
3. All Void can be operated even during the compulsory  
status of modifier PLU entry.  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
VEGETABLE  
FRUIT  
SUBTL  
$3.00TF  
$1.30TF  
$4.30  
*
*
A L L V D  
JONES  
0153 17:22TM  
NON-ADD NUMBER PRINT  
Non-add numbers can be entered and printed for future references, to indicate codes or numbers of  
customers, media checks, credit cards, etc. The entered numbers do not affect any sale total data.  
OPERATION  
(allowed any time during a sale or transaction)  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
( ---  
) | Number | [#]  
Max. 18 digits.  
---  
Non-add No.  
Print  
#1234  
PO  
$6.50  
$7.50  
$ 1 4. 0 0  
PO  
CASH  
– 46 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
NUMBER-OF-GUESTS ENTRY  
This operation is used to enter the number of guests of the sale.  
OPERATION  
(---  
)
---  
| Number of guests | [GUEST No.]  
Max. 3 digits  
NOTES: 1. The Number-of-Guests entry is allowed at the start of or any time during a sale if before the  
sale finalization by media keys.  
2. When the operation is made more than once in a sale, the last entry is valid.  
3. The number entered is processed into the Tray Counter in the report memory.  
4. When the “No.-of-Guests Compulsory” option is selected, a sale cannot be finalized for  
payment until a number-of-guests entry is operated. However, the [TOTAL] key is operable  
even in this case.  
5. When a number-of guests entry has not been made with the “No-of-Guests Not Compulsory”  
option, the count “1” is added to the Tray Counter in the report memory.  
SCALE ENTRY  
(The department or PLU through which scale items are entered must be a Scale-Allow  
department or a Scale-Compulsory PLU)  
OPERATION  
(1) Auto Scale Entry (without tare, or with tare auto-subtraction)  
(M)  
•
Through Dept: Place the item on  
the scale platter.  
[SCALE]  
For entry with General  
Weight Unit  
| Unit Weight | [@/FOR]  
....  
1 to 9 (LB or Kg), 10 for 1/2LB or  
100g, 11 for 1/4LB (when the Unit  
Weight is different from the General  
Weight Unit)  
---  
| Unit Price | [Open DEPT]  
per Unit Weight  
| Open-Dept Code | [DP#] | Unit Price | [AMT]  
per Unit Weight  
Place the item on  
the scale platter.  
•
•
Through Preset-PLU:  
Through Open-PLU:  
([SCALE])  
(M)  
(M)  
---  
| Preset PLU Code | [PLU]  
Place the item on  
the scale platter.  
([SCALE])  
---  
| Open-PLU Code | [PLU] | Unit Price | [AMT]  
per Unit Weight  
NOTE: When the PLU is programmed with a Tara Table No., the tare weight is automatically  
subtracted from the scaled weight, and thus only the net weight is processed.  
– 47 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
(2) Auto Scale With Tare  
| Tare Table No. | [TARE]  
to be continued to the arrows marked with “(M)” in  
the above three operation sequences of the Auto  
Scale Entry.  
1 to 9  
(3) Manual Scale Entry (It may be prohibited by a program option.)  
| Net Weight | of the item  
[SCALE]  
to be continued to the arrows marked with  
“(M)” in the above three operation sequences  
of the Auto Scale Entry.  
1 to 99999  
(unit: g or 1/100 LB. For example, enter 5 for 0.05LB.  
(4) Return or Void Manual Scale Entry (It may be prohibited by a program option.)  
[RTN MDSE] for Return  
to be continued to the top of the “Manual Scale Entry”  
sequence above.  
[VOID] for Void  
LISTING CAPACITY OPEN  
For Department and PLUs  
Depress [LCOPEN](or[OPEN])priortooranytimeduringanentryofanopen-department, open-PLU,  
or preset-open department or PLU sequence (including REPEAT and QUANTITY EXTENSION  
entries). Please note that the [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key must be pressed, at latest, before the final key  
oftheentrysequence. TheHighAmountLimitforthedepartmentorPLUwillbeextendedwithtwohigher  
digits, and the Low Amount Limit will be extended with one lower digit. For entering an amount still  
exceeding these limits, you must call for a Manager Intervention.  
For Media Tender Amounts  
Depress [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) before or after the amount but Media Key. The High Amount Limit  
for the media tendering will be extended with one higher digit. In need of still exceeding this limit, you  
must call for a Manager Intervention.  
For Amounts through [DOLL DISC], [VND CPN], [STR CPN], [BTL RTN]  
To exceed their limits, you must always call for a Manager Intervention. The [LC OPEN] or [OPEN] key  
will not be effective. As for the [STR CPN] key only, the amount is limited by both High Amount Limit  
of the department through which the store coupon amount is entered and the amount limit for [STR  
CPN]. That is, when an amount cannot be entered using [LC OPEN] or [OPEN], you must call for a  
Manager Intervention.  
SELECTIVE ITEMIZER (SI) STATUS MODIFICATION  
Depress [SI/M] (or [SI1/M] and/or [SI2/M]) for entering the required Department or PLU item, the same way  
as [LC OPEN] is operated for Departments and PLUs. The Sl-net status is reversed to non-net status, and  
vice versa.  
TAX STATUS or FOOD STAMP STATUS MODIFICATION  
Depress [TX/M] (or [TX1/M], [TX2/M], [TX3/M], [TX4/M], [GST/M]), in the same way as [LC OPEN] is  
operated, prior to or any time during the entry sequence of the required Department, PLU, or any other tax-  
status-programmable item ([DOLL DISC], [%-], [%+], [STR CPN], [VND CPN], [BTL RTN]). The taxable  
status is reversed to non-taxable, and vice versa. The [FS/M] key operates the same to reverse from the  
Food Stampable status to non-stampable, and vice versa, of the required item.  
– 48 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
MANUAL TAX ENTRY (where irregular tax amount addition is applied)  
OPERATION  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
---  
---  
| Irregular Tax Amount to be Added | [TAX]  
TAX5  
$0.50  
SUBTOTAL (Sale Total Pre-taxed) READ  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
OPERATION  
[ST]  
---  
---  
SUBTL  
$6.00  
.
The sale total (pre-taxed) of the items so far entered is displayed (and printed if so  
programmed), but the sale is not finalized. Additional item entries are allowed, if any.  
TAXABLE TOTAL (Sale Total With Taxes) READ  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
OPERATION  
[TXBL TL]  
TXBL TL  
$9.20  
---  
---  
.
The sale total including taxes due of the items so far entered is displayed (and printed if so  
programmed), but the sale is not finalized. Additional item entries are allowed, if any.  
NOTES: 1. Taxable total including a PB amount is displayed during Previous Balance entry. However,  
taxable total excluding a PB amount is displayed during Check Track entry.  
2. If connecting a Remote Kitchen Printer of the data buffering feature, all the menu items  
entered are printed on the Remote Kitchen Printer when the [TXBL TL] key is depressed.  
TAXABLE TOTAL READ and SUBTOTAL PRINT  
(when only one of [ST] and [TXBL TL] keys, not both, is installed on the keyboard)  
In this case, the key is usually programmed as [ST] key with [TXBL TL] functions. Since this key has both  
[ST] and [TXBL TL] functions, it may be labeled as "[ST]" in some stores or as "[TXBL TL]" in others.  
OPERATION  
[ST]  
---  
---  
(or [TXBL TL])  
.
The sale total including taxes of the items so far entered is displayed (and the sale total pre-  
taxed is printed if so programmed), but the sale is not finalized.  
Additional item entries are allowed, if any.  
– 49 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
SELECTIVE ITEMIZER (SI) TOTAL READ  
OPERATION  
-- Journal Print Format --  
.
---  
[SI/TL]  
(for Single-SI Machine)  
---  
SNACK  
SI1 TL  
TAX  
$10.00TS  
-0.70  
$0.60  
([SI1/TL] and/or [SI/2/TL] for Dual-SI machine)  
SI Total Calculated  
.
CASH  
$ 9 . 9 0  
The SI total is displayed and printed on the journal  
(and printed on receipt if so programmed.)  
NOTE:  
The fraction process method is fixed to Round OFF.  
TAX CALCULATION AND PRINT  
Your register has been programmed with proper tax tables (tax breaks and/or tax rates). Each department  
or PLU has been programmed with proper tax status, i.e. taxable or non-taxable status of each Tax (of  
maximum 4 taxes of Tax 1 to Tax 4, and GST).  
On finalizing a sale, the taxes due are automatically calculated and printed on the receipt, and thus added  
to the sale.  
Whether all taxes (Tax 1 to Tax 4, and GST) are consolidated into one line print or individually printed in  
separate lines is a program option.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TAX1  
TAX2  
CASH  
$2.48  
$0.66  
$ 1 6 . 3 4  
Example of  
Consolidated  
Print Line  
Example of  
Separate Print  
Lines  
TAX  
CASH  
$3.14  
$ 1 6 . 3 4  
TAX EXEMPTION  
OPERATION  
Exemption from Selective Taxes  
Examples)  
[TX1/M] [EX]  
[GST/M]  
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [EX]  
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [EX]  
Sale Finalization ... to exempt from Tax 1 only  
Sale Finalization ... to exempt from GST only  
Sale Finalization ... to exempt from Tax 1 & Tax 2  
Sale Finalization ... to exempt from Tax 1, Tax 2, & Tax 3  
Exemption from All Taxes  
[EX]  
Sale Finalization  
to exempt from all taxes.  
[TX1/M] [TX2/M] [TX3/M] [TX4/M] [EX]  
Sale Finalization  
NOTE:  
On depressing [EX], the sale total including the exempted tax(es) is displayed and pre-taxed  
amount of the sale portion subject to the tax exemption is printed.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Pre-taxed amount of the sale portion subject to Tax1 Exemption  
Pre-taxed amount of the sale portion subject to Tax2 Exemption  
TAX1EX  
TAX2EX  
$9.90  
$3.30  
– 50 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
FOOD STAMPABLE TOTAL READ, FOOD STAMP TENDERING  
OPERATION  
---  
[FSTL TEND]  
| Food Stamp Tendered Amount | [FSTL TEND]  
---  
Tendering in Food Stamp  
(This must be operated first of all the payments in finalizing  
the sale if food stamps are part of the payment.)  
.
Displays the Food  
Stampable total.  
... When the Food Stamp tendered amount is less than the sale total, the sale is not  
finalized with the balance still due displayed. Then it can be finalized with cash or other  
media total or tendering operations.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Entire Sale Total  
Food Stampable Total  
Food Stamp Tendered Amount  
Change in Cash  
TOTAL  
FS/TL  
F-STMP  
CHANGE  
FS CHG  
$ 1 2 . 7 2  
$12.72  
$15.00  
$0.28  
Change is Food Stamp  
$2.00  
SALE FINALIZATION BY MEDIA KEYS  
OPERATION  
([TXBL TL])  
[AT/TL]  
finalize without tendering  
| Tendered Amount |  
finalize with tendering and  
change calculation  
[CHECK TEND]  
[Chg]  
([TXBL TL])  
finalize without tendering  
| Tendered Amount |  
finalize with tendering and  
change calculation  
[MISC TEND]  
Other media keys  
Tendered  
Amount  
| Quantity | [@/FOR]  
max. 3 digits  
| Code for Credit Card Company |  
1 to 12  
[CARD No.]  
(| Tendered Amount |)  
[Chg]  
NOTES:  
1. Whether each Media Key is depressed with a prior tendered amount entry or not is  
determined by the key status selections programmed for each media key.  
2. If the sale total is zero, any Media Key must be depressed without a tendered amount  
entry even if the key is programmed as "Tender" key.  
3. When a non-cash media key is programmed as "Tender-only" key, it cannot finalize a  
negative balance sale. Whether a "Total-only" or "Tender/Total" key can finalize a  
negative balance sale or not is a program option. Each of non-cash media key with  
Tender function may be programmed to prohibit Over-tendering and/or Short-tendering.  
– 51 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
4. When a media is programmed to allow "Total" function, it can also be programmed with the  
"Drawer Open" or "Not Open" status on operating the key.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
( Cash Total)  
( Cash Tender )  
TAX  
CASH  
$0.48  
$ 8 . 4 8  
TAX  
TOTAL  
CATEND  
CHANGE  
$0.48  
$ 8 . 4 8  
$10.00  
$1.52  
MULTI-TENDERING  
Short-tendering repeated multiple times by the same media (allowed only when the media key is  
programmed to allow short-tendering).  
OPERATION  
| 1st Amount Tendered | [MEDIA]  
(| Quantity | [@/FOR])  
(| Quantity | [@/FOR])  
Repeat if not yet finalized.  
---  
([TXBL TL])  
| 2nd Amount Tendered | [MEDIA]  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TAX  
$0.48  
$ 8 . 4 8  
$5.00  
$5.00  
$1.52  
TOTAL  
CATEND  
CATEND  
CHANGE  
Multi-tendering by [AT/TL] key  
Change due, as the result of the 2nd amount tendered  
SPLIT TENDERING  
Short-tendering repeated multiple times by the different media keys (allowed only when the media keys are  
programmed to allow short-tendering).  
OPERATION  
Example 1)  
([TXBL TL])  
(| Quantity | [@/FOR] )  
---  
| Check Amount Tendered | [CHECK TEND]  
| Cash Amount Tendered | [AT/TL] ... Check & Cash  
| Company Code | [CARD No.] [Chg] ... Check and Credit Card  
| Cash Amount Tendered | [AT/TL] [Chg] ... Check, Cash, & Charge  
Example 2)  
---  
([TXBL TL])  
| Cash Amount Tendered | [AT/TL]  
[Chg] ... Cash and Charge  
– 52 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
NOTES: 1. In both MULTI-TENDERING and SPLIT TENDERING  
operations, the sale is finalized and a receipt is issued  
on reaching the sale total amount.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TAX  
$0.48  
$ 8 . 4 8  
$5.00  
TOTAL  
CHECK  
CASH  
2. If a media key is depressed without an amount tender  
entry and the key is programmed to function as "Total"  
key, the sale is then finalized on that stage processing  
the balance at that moment into that media.  
$3.48  
CHECK CASHING (No-sale cashing of a non-cash media)  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
OPERATION  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
| Check Amount to be Cashed | [CHECK TEND]  
... The drawer opens to enable the exchange.  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
NOTE: Other non-cash media keys may be used for this  
purpose if programmed to allow no-purchase  
cashing.  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
Check Amount Cashed  
CHECK  
JONES  
$ 1 0 . 0 0  
0189 17:44TM  
SALE PAID IN FOREIGN CURRENCIES  
OPERATION  
Amount Tendered in  
Foreign Currency  
[TXBL TL]  
[CUR1]  
[CUR1]  
[AT/TL]  
---  
.
.
.
Mandatory for a  
sale paid in foreign  
currencies.  
Displays the  
equivalent value in  
Foreign Currency 1.  
.
Other media keys  
Display the entered  
foreign currency amount.  
may be used if paid  
in that media. (The  
media key must be  
programmed to  
allow tendering in  
this case.)  
.
Displays the domestic currency  
value equivalent to the tendered  
foreign currency.  
NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate the same as [CUR 1], except that each of these keys  
has its own exchange rate programmed corresponding to each foreign currency.  
2. The amount tendered in the foreign currency and its exchange rate may be programmed to  
print by program options.  
3. Multi-tenderingwiththesameforeigncurrencyorSplit-tenderingwithothermediasorforeign  
currencies are possible.  
4. The foreign currency keys cannot be used to finalize Received-on-Account payments, Paid-  
out items, or Previous Balance Entry.  
– 53 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
5. Whenatenderingbyaforeigncurrencyoccursduringashort-tenderedcondition, the [TXBL  
TL] key will not be mandatory.  
6. A sale of negative balance cannot be finalized using any of the foreign currency keys.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TAX  
$0.48  
$ 8 . 4 8  
50.00  
TOTAL  
CUR1  
Amount Tendered in CUR1  
CUR1 Exchange Rate  
Optional Print  
5.3729*  
Domestic Currency Value equivalent to the tendered foreign currency amount  
Change due (to be refunded in Domestic Currency)  
CATEND  
CHANGE  
$9.31  
$0.83  
NO-SALE EXCHANGE from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
OPERATION  
[CUR 1]  
| Amount of Foreign Currency 1 to be exchanged | [NS]  
... The drawer opens to enable exchange. Displays the domestic currency  
amount equivalent to the entered foreign currency amount.  
NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate the same.  
2. The fraction process method is fixed to Round OFF.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
CUR2  
10.00  
$5.68  
1.7619*  
Amount of CUR2 to be exchanged  
Exchange Rate (optional print)  
Domestic Currency amount equivalent to the CUR2  
CHANGE  
JONES  
0197 18:02TM  
NO-SALE EXCHANGE from Domestic Currency to Foreign Currency  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
OPERATION  
| Amount of Domestic Currency to be exchanged | [CUR 1]  
[NS]  
... The drawer opens to enable exchange. The display content of the CUR 1 value obtained on  
the [CUR 1] key depression is held.  
NOTES: 1. The [CUR 2] to [CUR 5] keys operate the same.  
2. This operation (exchange from domestic to foreign currencies) may be prohibited by a  
program option.  
3. The fraction process method is ruled by "Foreign Currency Rounding Process Setting".  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
Domestic Currency amount to be exchanged  
Exchange Rate of CUR3 (optional print)  
CUR3 amount equivalent to the domestic currency amount  
CATEND  
CUR3  
$1.00  
1.45  
1.445*  
JONES  
0198 18:03TM  
– 54 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
RECEIVED-ON-ACCOUNT  
A received-on-account transaction is used to identify money which is in the drawer but not from the daily  
business.  
OPERATION  
| Amount of Payment | [R/A]  
| Cash Amount Tendered | [AT/TL]  
[ST]  
(if paid in cash)  
Repeatable if multiple amounts are  
received in one receipt sequence.  
(| Quantity | [@/FOR])  
| Check Amount Tendred | [CHECK TEND]  
(if paid in cash)  
[Chg] (if processed into charge account)  
Other Media Finalization  
This portion is the same as SALE FINALIZATION  
BY MEDIA KEYS already described.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
NOTES: 1. The media keys used for this operation must be  
R/A  
R/A  
$5.00  
$3.00  
programmed to allow received-on-account entries.  
SUBTL  
CASH  
$8.00  
$ 8 . 0 0  
2. MULTI-TENDERING and SPLIT-TENDERING  
(already described) are also applied to the finalization  
of received-on-account payments.  
JONES  
0199 18:04TM  
PAID-OUT  
A paid-out transaction is used when money is removed from the drawer without totaling to a sale.  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
| Amount to be paid out | [PO] ([ST])  
Repeatable if multiple amounts  
OPERATION  
[AT/TL]  
to be paid out are recorded in  
one receipt sequence.  
NOTE:  
Only [AT/TL] can finalize paid-out amount (i.e. must always be paid out in cash).  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
PO  
PO  
$4.50  
$3.20  
SUBTL  
CASH  
$7.70  
$ 7 . 7 0  
JONES  
0202 18:05TM  
– 55 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
SALESPERSON ENTRY (Salesperson Sign-ON)  
OPERATION  
... The name of the person is displayed and  
---  
| Salesperson Code | [SALES PERSON]  
printed on both journal and receipt.  
1 to 99  
Programmable options relating to Salesperson Entries:  
•
•
•
Salesperson's name non-print on receipt (print on journal only)  
Salesperson Entry compulsory before sale item entries  
Salesperson Entry Prohibited during a sale (i.e. al-  
lowedonlyonepersonentryatthestartingofasalebut  
prohibits any other salesperson entry once the sale is  
started.) When this program is not selected, up to five  
salespersons can sign ON during one sale.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
02 Stacy  
The salesperson entry status (salesperson Signed-ON condition)  
will be held until:  
Salesperson's  
Name  
•
•
Another salesperson entry is operated, or  
The sale is finalized.  
Salesperson  
Code  
FUNCTION KEY ENTRY  
This operation will execute a string of key operations preprogrammed on each [FUNCTION] key.  
OPERATION  
---  
[FUNCTION]  
(
---)  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
.
[FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 10]  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
•
Thefollowingkeyoperationsarepre-programmed  
on the [FUNCTION 5] key in this example.  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
[1] [00] [DP1] [ST] [AT/TL]  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
NOTE: The following key operations are preprogrammed to  
the [FUNCTION 1] to [FUNCTION 4] keys as initial  
setting.  
VEGETABLE  
SUBTL  
TAX  
$1.00TF  
$1.00  
$0.21  
•
•
•
•
[FUNCTION 1]  
[FUNCTION 2]  
[FUNCTION 3]  
[FUNCTION 4]  
[1] [00] [AT/TL]  
[5] [00] [AT/TL]  
CASH  
$ 1 . 0 6  
[1] [0] [00] [AT/TL]  
[2] [0] [00] [AT/TL]  
ITEM  
JONES  
1
0207 18:07TM  
– 56 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TIP PAID  
OPERATION  
| Cashier Code | [TIP PAID]  
| Tip Amount |  
[AT/TL]  
Max. 7 digits  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TIP PAID JONES  
CASH  
$1.00  
SMITH  
0028 14:09TM  
CHARGE TIP  
OPERATION  
Order Entry (or Additional Order Entry)  
| Tip Amount | [CHARGE TIP]  
Max. 7 digits  
Payment Entry using the  
media as the tip.  
NOTES: 1. The [AT/TL] key cannot be used as the first tendering after a Charge Tip Entry.  
2. A charge tip operation cannot be executed during the Check Track entry.  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
P B +  
$0.00  
$4.50T  
$2.20T  
$2.50T  
$1.40T  
$1.00  
Frd Chicken  
Veget. Salad  
Corn Soup  
Beer  
CHG TIP  
TAX1  
$0.64  
TAX2  
TOTAL  
CHECK  
CHANGE  
$0.07  
$1 2 . 3 1  
$20.00  
$7.69  
TEM  
SMITH  
4
0030 14:17TM  
– 57 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
RECEIPT POST-ISSUE  
(must be operated outside a sale)  
(A sale is finalized) [RECEIPT ISSUE]  
Programmable options:  
OPERATION  
•
•
Post-issue receipt is available only when the sale has been finalized with the sale has been  
finalized in Receipt-OFF mode.  
Available regardless of Receipt-ON/OFF mode (in this case two receipts may be obtained for one  
sale.)  
•
•
Post-issuereceiptisitemizedreceiptforasaleofmaximum50lines. Exceeding50lines, thepost-  
issue receipt is total-only receipt.  
Post-issue receipt is always total-only receipt regardless of the number of lines of a sale.  
•
•
Post-issue receipt is issued only once.  
Post-issue receipt can be issued any number of times.  
NOTES: 1. The post-issue receipt content will not be printed on the Guest Check Printer.  
2. The post-issue receipt is not available for Received-on-Account or Paid-Out transactions.  
3. The post-issue receipt operation is not effective for the Check Track entry.  
-- Post-issue Receipt --  
Itemized Type  
Total-only Type  
-- Ordinary Receipt --  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
VEGETABLE  
Cheese  
%-  
$1.00TF  
$2.50TF  
*
C O P Y  
*
*
C O P Y  
*
VEGETABLE  
Cheese  
%-  
$1.00TF  
$2.50TF  
TOTAL  
JONES  
$ 3 . 5 8  
0213 18:20TM  
5%  
-0.13T  
$0.06  
$ 3 . 5 8  
$5.00  
TAX  
5%  
-0.13T  
$0.06  
$ 3 . 5 8  
$5.00  
TOTAL  
CATEND  
CHANGE  
TAX  
TOTAL  
CATEND  
CHANGE  
This line is printed only when a post-  
issue receipt is issued after the  
Ordinary Receipt is issued, or the  
second and subsequent post-issue  
receipts are issued.  
$1.42  
$1.42  
ITEM  
2
JONES  
0213 18:14TM  
ITEM  
2
JONES  
0213 18:14TM  
– 58 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TRAY TOTAL  
OPERATION  
Menu item Entries  
[TRAY TOTAL]  
Sale Finalization by Media Keys  
[TOTAL] ... to transfer all the balance  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
P B +  
$0.00  
Pork Saute  
$4.50T  
ITEM  
TRAY TL  
1
$4.50  
1st Tray Total Separator Line  
--------------------------  
Fried Shrimp  
Coke Small-B  
TAX1  
$6.50T  
$0.70T  
$0.43  
$0.03  
TAX2  
ITEM  
TRAY TL  
2
$7.66  
2nd Tray Total Separator Line  
--------------------------  
TAX1  
TAX2  
CASH  
$0.70  
$0.03  
$1 2 . 4 3  
Entire Sale Data  
ITEM  
SMITH  
3
0031 14:24TM  
EAT-IN/TAKEOUT ENTRY  
OPERATION  
.....  
.....  
.....  
(
(
) [EAT IN]  
(Eat-in entry)  
.....  
) [TAKEOUT]  
(Takeout entry)  
NOTES: 1. Depressing the [EAT IN] or [TAKEOUT] key is allowed any number of times during one  
sale. The last key entered is effective.  
2. Program option allows you to select either Eat-in entry or Takeout entry as standard. In  
this case, Eat-in or Takeout entry is available without depressing the respective keys.  
3. Eat-in or Takeout entry is unavailable after tax exemption.  
Eat-in Symbol  
Takeout Symbol  
∗ E A T  
I N  
∗
∗ E A T  
O U T  
∗
– 59 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
CALL NO. ENTRY  
This operation is used to enter the call No. of order, and to print its No. on the receipt and the journal.  
OPERATION  
.....  
.....  
(
) | CALL NO. | [CALL No.]  
Max. 3 digits  
NOTES:  
1. Call No. entry is allowed any time during a sale.  
2. Call No. entry is allowed any number of times during one sale.  
•
•
On receipt and journal, all the Call Nos. entered during one sale are printed.  
On RKP, the only last entered Call No. is printed.  
3. Compulsion of Call No. entry can be programmed by the program option. In this case,  
the sale finalization is not allowed unless entering the Call No.  
4. Automatic creation of Call No. can be programmed by the program option. In this case,  
the Call No. is automatically created when a department/PLU item is entered.  
5. Call No. entry is unavailable when the drive-through option is selected.  
Call No. Symbol  
C A L L  
N O  
011  
Call No.  
The lowest digit of the register No.  
DRIVE-THROUGH ENTRY  
This operation is available only when the drive-through spec. is selected in the program option.  
OPERATION  
Same as  
DEPARTMENT ENTRY  
PLU ENTRY  
SET MENU ENTRY  
NOTES:  
1. Order No. (3-digit value; the lowest digit of the register No. and the order No.) is  
automatically created when a department/PLU item is entered.  
•
•
Number of order tables  
Order No.  
Max.50  
01 to 50  
Order No. is printed on both journal and receipt when entering the first menu item. If  
connecting a remote kitchen printer, its No. is also printed on the top of remote kitchen  
printer paper. As for a remote kitchen printer of "Send on the Fly" feature, order No. is  
printed on the top of all the pieces of its paper which are issued every one menu item.  
2. Entry of a department/PLU item causes an error while all the order tables have been  
used.  
3. Drive-through entry is unavailable when the check track feature is selected.  
– 60 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
RECALL ENTRY  
This operation recalls a order table.  
OPERATION  
| Order No. | [RECALL]  
Sale finalization  
Transmitting  
only additional  
items to RKP  
Additional order entry  
[TOTAL]  
Sale finalization  
NOTE:  
Recall Entry can be canceled.  
To end the entry, follow the procedure described below.  
[RECALL]  
[ITEM CORR]  
[ALL VOID]  
[AT/TL] (or other media)  
[ITEM CORR]  
VALIDATION PRINT  
OPERATION  
After entering the required  
item through a transaction  
key or media key. (NOTE 1)  
Insert a validation slip into  
the validation slot. make  
sure that the "SLIP" lamp is  
steadily lit. (NOTE 2)  
[VALIDATE]  
NOTES: 1. If the "SLIT" lamp flickers during  
registrations,itindicatesthatthelastitem  
just entered is programmed to require  
validation print. In this case, no other  
operations can follow until the validation  
print of the item is first executed.  
2. Because printing occurs on the front side  
of the slip, please be certain to insert the  
slip into the validation with the printing  
side frontward.  
3. No other operations can follow until the  
validation slip once printed is withdrawn.  
4. The following are programmable  
selections relating to validation:  
Validation Slot  
(1) PRINT FORMAT  
Validation Slip  
a) Date Print/Non-print  
b) Consecutive No. Print/Non-print  
c) Cashier No. Print/Non-print  
(2) MULTI- or SINGLE-VALIDATION (Number of times of validation print allowed for the  
same item)  
(3) VALIDATION COMPULSORY status on Media Keys and other transaction keys.  
5. When the sale-finalizing media key is programmed with Validation Compulsory status and  
the key is used with over-tendering, the drawer will open on the compulsory validation print.  
6. When the sale-finalizing media key is programmed with Validation Compulsory status and  
the key is used with equal-tendering or used as Total key, the drawer will open even if the  
status "Not Open" is programmed on the key.  
– 61 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
12-19-94 01CL0146 Cheese  
12-19-94 01CL0146 RTN  
12-19-94 01CL0146  
$2.5OTF  
→
→
→
→
→
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
VEGETABLE -1.2OTF  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
TXBLTL  
#123456  
ABC  
$1.38  
←
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
12-19-94 01CL0146  
Cheese  
RTN  
VEGETABLE  
TXBL TL  
#123456  
TAX  
$2.50TF  
12-19-94 01CL0146  
$1.38  
-1.20TF  
$1.38  
Date  
Receipt  
Consecutive No.  
Amount  
Item Name  
Cashier ID  
(Manager-assign  
portion code)  
$0.08  
ABC  
$ 1 . 3 8  
When the option "Total Validation" (Prints SALE TOTAL after [TXBL TL]) is selected,  
the sale total will be printed (instead of Taxable Total) on the validation slip on a  
[VALIDATE] key depression after the [TXBL TL] key is operated. In this case, only  
the finalization of the sale can follow.  
ITEM  
JONES  
0
0221 13:35TM  
ENDORSEMENT PRINT  
OPERATION  
After operating the required  
non-cash media key (usually  
the [CHECK TEND] key)  
Insert the check or the  
Enter the Check No.  
(if so programmed),  
and then depress  
[CHECK NO.] key.  
required slip into the Guest  
Check Printer (or into the  
Validation Slot of the  
Receipt/Journal Printer with  
multi-validation function.)  
NOTES:  
1. Endorsement Message can be printed on the Receipt/Journal Printer with Multi-  
validation Function.  
2. The Check No. entry prior to the [CHECK NO.] key may be programmed to be  
compulsory.  
-- Endorsement Print Sample --  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
Printed on Guest Check Printer:  
VEGETABLE  
FRUIT  
MEAT  
-1.20TF  
$6.50TF  
$6.00TF  
$0.68  
CHECK  
324628  
Chenck No. Line  
T E C S T O R E  
1343 PEACH DRIVE, TORRANCE,  
CALIFORNIA  
Endorsement Message Lines  
TAX  
TOTAL  
CHECK  
CHANGE  
$ 1 1 . 9 8  
$15.00  
Total Line (may not be printed)  
Check Amount Line  
Cashier ID, Consecutive. No.,  
TOTAL  
$ 1 1 . 9 8  
$ 1 5 . 0 0  
#3001 CHECK  
$3.02  
1CL 0222 19-12-1994 14:35TM  
Date, Time  
ITEM  
1
Printed on Receipt/Journal Printer:  
JONES  
0222 14:35TM  
T E C S T O R E  
1343 PEACH DRIVE, TORRANCE,  
CALIFORNIA  
TOTAL  
$ 1 1 . 9 8  
$ 1 5 . 0 0  
#3001 CHECK  
1CL 0222 19-12-1994 14:35TM  
– 62 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
GUEST CHECK PRINTER (hardware option) OPERATION  
The TEC Guest Check Printer DRS-207 may be connected to the FS-1650 series ECR as an optional  
device. The Guest Check Printer will operate printing if a slip is properly inserted, regardless of the Mode  
Lock position (except that no print will occur in the "SET" mode or during program verification in the "X"  
mode).  
1. The guest check printer will automatically activate printing when the slip has properly been set to the  
printer table.  
2. The following are selective status programmable relating to the guest check printer. Ask the store  
manager and mark the status selected for your store.  
SYSTEM OPTIONS RELATING TO GUEST CHECK CONTROL  
•
•
Guest Check Print compulsory for Previous Balance entry, Check Track entry or Drive-through entry:  
Standard: COMPULSORY  
Option:  
FREE (Not compulsory)  
Code No. (Check No.) Entry Before [CHECK NO.] key at Endorsement Print (Refer to ENDORSE-  
MENT PRINT operation already stated.)  
Standard: FREE (Not compulsory)  
Option:  
COMPULSORY  
•
Date on the guest check  
Standard: PRINT  
Option:  
NON-PRINT  
3. The gap of the slip inlet is usually opened, and the slip may be inserted or withdrawn freely outside a  
receipt/journal print sequence.  
When a slip is properly set to the guest check printer and the ECR is operated, the gap will be closed  
and printing will be performed. When the sale is finalized and the receipt is issued, the gap of the DRS-  
207 will be opened to allow the slip withdrawal. (The gap keeps closed during sale item entries.)  
4. The EJECT key on the DRS-207 may be used to open the closed gap in order to withdraw the slip and  
skip unnecessary item print. The EJECT key will be disregarded if the slip is set and the ECR receipt/  
journal printer is in a printing action.  
5. Printing on the guest check will be performed alternately with printing on the receipt/journal of the ECR.  
6. Whenprintingofacheckrequiresmorethanonepage,operateasinthefollowingformulti-pageprocess:  
1) When printing reaches the last line (limit line) of the first page, printing stops, and the AMOUNT  
portion of the display flickers.  
2) Withdraw the first page, and insert the second page.  
Then depress the [C] key on the ECR Keyboard. Printing resumes.  
7. To make an additional order(s) when an entry(ies) has already been made on the check slip, use the  
[GCP LINE #] key. For its entry procedure and receipt sample, refer to ADDITIONAL ORDER ENTRY  
already stated.  
– 63 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
WHEN A POWER FAILURE OCCURS ...  
If a power failure occurs, all sales data stored in the memory are automatically protected by the battery  
installed in the ECR. The battery is rechargeable and it is recharged when the AC power returns. As the  
power returns, the register revives to continue the work and displays the last item entered before the power  
failure. However, pleasenotethefollowingphenomenatooccurontheregisterwhenthepowerisregained:  
1.  
The printer will work to print the entered data without failure after the power recovery, if any data was  
being printed. However, one extra line may be fed on the power recovery depending on the power-  
recovery timing.  
Example:  
RTN  
One extra line is fed here, i.e., a power  
failure occurred during printing the  
returned item of "VEGETABLE $1.45".  
VEGETABLE  
RTN  
Soup Can  
-1.45TF  
-0.45TF  
2.  
The following are the display indications on the power recovery:  
ECR CONDITION at the  
time of Power Failure  
DISPLAY INDICATION on the  
Power Recovery  
No key-in has been  
operated.  
Displays zero. Operations may go  
on.  
Numeric or Declaration keys  
have been entered but not  
motorized keys.  
Regains the display content that was  
obtained just before the power  
failure. The operations may be  
continued.  
OUTSIDE A SALE  
No Numeric or Declaration  
keys have been enterd.  
Regains the display content that was  
obtained just before the power  
failure. The operations may be  
continued.  
Numeric or Declaration keys  
have been entered.  
DURING A SALE  
In the event of a power failure, it is suggested to check the receipt print content before the receipt  
is handed to the customer.  
– 64 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
11. JOURNAL AND RECEIPT PAPER-END  
DETECTOR  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
This detects when either the journal or receipt paper is coming near the end. It is provided in order  
to prompt the operator to replace the old paper roll with a new one.  
When the paper roll comes near the end (or the paper has not been set properly), no key operation  
will be accepted and the AMOUNT portion of the display will keep flickering.  
When a new paper roll is set, only the [RF] and [JF] keys are allowed to operate. Next, when the [C]  
key is depressed, the display flickering will be cleared and normal key-in operations will be accepted.  
If any printing was suspended, it will continue printing.  
(4)  
(5)  
If this detector senses a paper-end condition during printing, the printing will stop after the current line  
printing is completed.  
If the [C] key is depressed in the paper-end condition, it will be ignored. The [C] key depression will  
be effective to clear the display flickering only after the new paper roll is set.  
(For further details, refer to Chapter 15.)  
12. ECR PRINTER MOTOR LOCK DETECTOR  
(1)  
(2)  
This detects the printer motor lock condition caused by some trouble.  
When such a condition is detected, the front display indicates "Error" and none of the keys (including  
[RF] and [JF]) will be accepted.  
(3)  
To regain the normal condition, turn the power of the ECR to OFF, remove the cause of the motor  
lock, and then turn the power to ON again.  
13. GUEST CHECK PRINTER MOTOR LOCK  
DETECTOR  
(1)  
(2)  
This detects the guest check printer motor lock condition caused by some trouble.  
When such a condition is detected, the front display indicates "Error" and none of the keys (including  
[RF] and [JF]) will be accepted.  
(3)  
*
To regain the normal condition, turn the powers of the ECR and the guest check printer to OFF,  
remove the cause of the motor lock, and then turn the powers to ON again.  
If the cause cannot be found in the guest check printer and only the ECR may be required to work  
temporarilywithouttheguestcheckprinter, removetheguestcheckprintercablefromtheECR, andturn  
the power of the ECR to ON.  
14. PRINTER GUIDE OPEN DETECTOR  
(1)  
(2)  
This detects the printer guide open condition.  
When such a condition is detected, the front display indicates "Error" and none of the keys (including  
[RF] and [JF]) will be accepted.  
(3)  
To regain the normal condition, turn the power of the ECR to OFF, close the printer guide, and then  
turn the power to ON again.  
- 65 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
15. PAPER ROLL REPLACEMENT AND OTHER MAIN-  
TENANCE OPERATIONS  
WARNING!  
Care must be taken not to injure yourself with the paper cutter.  
Replacing the Receipt Roll  
1
2
3
4
To remove the Receipt Cover, insert the Receipt  
Cover Key to the Receipt Cover Lock, and turn it 90  
clockwise.  
Cut the Receipt Paper as shown in the figure.  
RF  
Depress the [RF] key to feed the remaining paper  
end.  
CAUTION: Never try to pull out the remaining paper  
end by hand.  
It may cause paper jamming.  
Load new paper roll as described in Chapter 6.  
- 66 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Replacing the Journal Roll  
To remove the Receipt Cover, insert the Receipt Cover Key  
to the Receipt Cover Lock, and turn it 90 clockwise.  
1
Depress the [JF] key to wind up enough of the Journal  
Paper, then cut the paper as shown in the figure. Depress  
the [JF] key to feed the remaining paper end.  
2
JF  
CAUTION: Never try to pull out the remaining paper end  
by hand.  
It may cause paper jamming.  
The wound-up portion of the paper can be easily removed  
from the Reel by pulling it sideways.  
3
Load new paper roll as described in Chapter 6.  
4
- 67 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Replacing the Ribbon Cassette  
When the print data on the receipt and journal becomes too dim, replace the Ribbon Cassette in the  
following order.  
Remove the Ribbon Cover.  
1
Remove the old ribbon cassette by pulling it in the direction  
of the arrow mark.  
2
3
4
Install a new ribbon cassette by inserting it in the direction  
of the arrow mark.  
Then, turn the knob of ribbon cassette several times in the  
arrow direction to take up the slack in the ribbon.  
Attach the Ribbon Cover.  
- 68 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Replenishing Ink to the Store Name Stamp  
To remove the Receipt Cover, insert the Receipt Cover Key  
to the Receipt Cover Lock, and turn it 90 clockwise.  
1
2
3
Remove the Store Name Stamp by pulling it in the direction  
of the arrow mark.  
Apply only two or three drops. Stamp may not print dark  
immediately. Allow time for ink to saturate the stamp.  
Install the stamp by inserting it in the direction of the arrow  
mark.  
4
5
Attach the Receipt Cover.  
- 69 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Manual Drawer Releasing  
The drawer opens automatically when a transaction has been entered. In the event of a power failure or  
other trouble, the drawer can be opened manually in the following manner:  
WARNING!  
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.  
1
Insert the Drawer Release Key into the drawer  
release lock and turn the key clockwise. The drawer  
will then open. (Fig. 1)  
2
The Drawer Release Key can be taken out by  
returning it to the original position.  
Fig. 1  
3
When the drawer is closed, it is automatically locked  
and will not open without the Drawer Release Key or  
a normal registering operation.  
Removing the Drawer  
1
Pull the drawer out, and when it stops at the stopper,  
lift the drawer up and pull it further out (Fig. 2).  
When it stops again at the roller fixed in the drawer  
housing, lift it and pull it out (Fig. 3)  
2
To return the drawer, follow the reverse procedure  
for removing.  
Fig. 2  
Fig. 3  
- 70 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
CDC (Cash Drawer Cover; Option) Lock  
Locking (Fig.4)  
Push the Cash Drawer Cover to the back of the drawer.  
1
2
Press the cover lightly, insert the key into the key hole on  
the cover, and turn it to lock.  
Fig. 4  
Unlocking  
Unlock the cover using the key, and lift the front end.  
- 71 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
16. SPECIFICATIONS  
Size ....................................................................460 mm (width) x 450 mm (depth) x 348 mm (height)  
(height including rubber feet) (or 412 mm-hight when  
Xustomer Display is popped up.)  
Weight ...............................................................16.5 kg  
Power Required................................................AC 117 V – 10%; 60 Hz  
(varies depending on the destination)  
Power Consumed .............................................0.6 A at 117 V  
Ambient Temprature ........................................0 C to 35 C  
Relative Humidity .............................................10% to 90% RH  
Size of Receipt and Journal Tape...................45 mm (width) x Max. 80 mm (diameter)  
- 72 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STAND-ALONE LEVEL  
MANAGER’S GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW .............................................................................................................. 1  
2. MANAGER INTERVENTION ............................................................................................................ 2  
3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE ...................................................................... 5  
4. OPERATIONS IN “ ” MODE.......................................................................................................... 7  
5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORT ............................................................................................... 10  
6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS ..................................................................................................... 28  
7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA..................................................................................... 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW  
The following shows the typical flow of daily operations on the ECR.  
CASHIER’S OPERATIONS  
MANAGER’S OPERATIONS OR ASSISTANCE  
(described in OPERATOR’S GUIDE)  
(described in MANAGER’S GUIDE)  
Sign-ON (or Cashier Key to ON)  
No-sale Receipt (to check the print condition,  
and check the date and time print)  
Adjust the date and time,  
if necessary, Chapter 6.  
(or by Manager)  
LOAN  
STORE OPEN  
Manager Interventions when requested (for  
such operations as Returned Merchandise,  
Dollar Discount, etc. Chapter 2)  
Sale entries start.  
Sign-OUT  
Sign-IN  
Sign-OFF Cashier Key  
Sign-ON Changes  
“X”reporttakings(salesdatareadingsduring  
the day. Chapter 5)  
... for breaks of the cashier, or for  
cashier changes  
.
.
.
.
.
Pick Up (money collections from the ECR  
drawer for banking purpose, etc. Chapter 3)  
Sale entries.  
Operationin“ - ”Mode(forentire-salereturn  
or cancel. Chapter 4)  
STORE CLOSE  
Sign-OFF (or Cashier Key to OFF)  
“X” report takings  
“Z” report takings  
(Chapter 5)  
OTHER OPERATIONS OUTSIDE STORE’S BUSINESS HOURS  
Programming Data Additions,  
Deletions, Changes (Chapter 6)  
Programmed Data Verification (Chapter 7)  
Training mode Start and End  
(OPERATOR’S GUIDE)  
Operations in Training Mode  
(for practicing of new cashiers)  
PAPER ROLL REPLACEMENT OR OTHER MAINTENANCE  
(OPERATOR’S GUIDE)  
- 1 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
2. MANAGER INTERVENTION  
2.1 MANAGER INTERVENTION  
During daily sale entry operations, the cashier may call for Manager Interventions. The following is the  
operation flow of a Manager Intervention.  
1) During operations, the cashier comes across an item that requires a Manager Intervention. The  
cashier, already informed of it, may immediately call for a Manager Intervention. Or the cashier,  
without knowing of it, attempts the operation, and error results with the Error Message “MANAGER  
REQUIRED” (programmable) displayed, clears the error by the [C] key, and then calls for a  
Manager Intervention.  
2) The manager goes to the cashier counter with the MGR or MA key.  
3) The cashier explains what kind of operation is attempted, and removes the REG key from the Mode  
Lock at the “REG” position.  
4) The manager inserts the MGR or MA key and turns it to the “MGR” position.  
5) The cashier operates the required item.  
6) The manager returns the MGR or key to the “REG” position and pulls it out.  
7) The cashier sets the REG key to the “REG” position again and continues registering operations.  
The following are the tables of the keys and operations that are programmable with Manager  
Intervention. Fillinthetablebymarkinginthe“NotRequired”or“Required”columnofeachitem,referring  
to the documents, etc. listed in the table.  
- 2 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
KEYS/OPERATIONS AND MANAGER INTERVENTION STATUS TABLE  
Manager Intervention  
Reference  
KEY  
Not required  
Required  
[DOLL DISC]  
[VND CPN]  
[STR CPN]  
[BTL RTN]  
[%] (or [% II])  
[RTN MDSE]  
[VOID]  
Chapter 7: VERIFICATION OF  
PROGRAMMED DATA  
• KEY STATUS READ  
As for changing the key status,  
ask your TOSHIBA TEC repre-  
sentative.  
[PO]  
[TIP PAID]  
[CHG TIP]  
[MENU SHIFT] (1 to 3)  
[EX]  
[NS]  
[ALL VOID]  
[CODE OPEN]  
Credit Balance (NOTE 1  
below)  
These are program options for  
each store.  
Ask your TOSHIBA TEC repre-  
sentative for information and  
these status changes.  
Negative-balance Sale  
Finalization by Media  
Keys except [AT/TL] and  
[FSTL TEND] (NOTE 2)  
Negative Department or  
negative PLU Entries  
(NOTE 3)  
NOTES: 1. The “Credit Balance” means that amount entries through [DOLL DISC], [VOID], [VND  
CPN], [STR CPN], [BTL RTN] will result in over-subtraction of the subtotal amount at the  
time of the entry through any of those keys. If the status “Not required” is selected, over-  
subtraction using these keys will be allowed in the “REG” mode. The [RTN MDSE] key,  
negative departments, and negative PLUs are not subject to this “Credit Balance” status  
selection.  
2. The “Negative-balance Sale” may be caused by:  
1. Credit Balance if “Not required” is selected as the above Credit Balance status.  
2. Amounts entered through the [RTN MDSE] key.  
3. Other negative amounts.  
3. The “Negative DEPT s or PLUs” are the DEPTs/PLUs programmed as negative status, but  
not normal DEPTs/PLUs through which Store Coupon or Returned Merchandise amounts  
are entered.  
- 3 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
2.2 OTHER OPERATIONS REQUIRING MANAGER INTER-  
VENTIONS  
Amount Limit Release  
Amount Limits may be programmed on Departments/PLUs, Tender Medias, [DOLL DISC], [VND CPN],  
[STR CPN], [BTL RTN]. These limits are programmed to check an excessively high or low amount entry  
by cashier’s mistake at the earliest stage. Guide your cashiers as in the following procedure:  
(1) During sale entries by the cashier, an error occurs with Error Message “OPE ERR” (programmable)  
displayed.  
(2) The cashier clears the error by the[C] key. The cashier confirms the amount and operate the item again.  
(3) If the same error occurs again, the cashier attempts to enter the amount using the[LC OPEN] or[OPEN]  
key.  
(4) Iftheoperationresultsinanerroragain, theAmountLimitcannotbesolvedbythe[LCOPEN]or [OPEN]  
key.  
(5) The cashier calls for Manager Intervention.  
The procedure thereafter is the same as Steps 2) to 7) for the ITEMS PROGRAMMED TO REQUIRE  
MANAGER INTERVENTIONS. (Section 2.1)  
n In need of information of Amount Limits, see the following:  
1) Individual Department High and Low Amount Limits (each PLU is restricted by the Amount Limits  
of its linked department): Ask your TOSHIBA TEC representative.  
2) DepartmentsCommonHighandLowAmountLimits,andHighAmountLimitsofTenderMediakeys:  
Chapter 7: VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
• FUNCTION KEYS AMOUNT LIMIT READ  
3) High Amount Limits for [DOLL DISC], [VND CPN], [STR CPN], and [BTL RTN] keys:  
Chapter 7: VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
• NEGATIVE AMOUNT KEY AMOUNT LIMIT READ  
4) For setting or changing the current Amount Limits, see the following:  
Chapter 6: PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
• AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING FOR FUNCTION KEYS (Submode 8)  
• NEGATIVE AMOUNT KEY AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING OR CHANGING (Submode 35)  
- 4 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
3. MANAGER’S OWN OPERATIONS IN “MGR” MODE  
The following are operations possible only in the “MGR” position of the Mode Lock, which are performed  
by the manager or by a person under the manager’s control.  
3.1. PICK UP OPERATION  
This operation is used when you collect money from the ECR drawer, during the day, for the banking  
purpose,etc. InordertorecordthemoneyamountscollectedandtosubtracttheamountsfromtheIn-drawer  
Totals memory , this operation is necessary.  
Any time outside a sale, in a Signed-ON condition.  
OPERATION  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: MGR  
[MEDIA KEY]  
(or [VND CPN],  
[FSTL TEND])  
[PO]  
| Media Amount Collected |  
([ST])  
[AT/TL]  
.
.
.
.
NOTE 2  
Drawer  
opens.  
NOTE 1  
Repeat until all the collected media amounts are recorded.  
NOTES: 1. As for each media and Food Stamp, its in-drawer limit amount can be programmed. On  
reaching this in-drawer limit when a sale is finalized, the message “DRAWER LIMIT”  
(programmable) is displayed with an alarm buzzer generated to indicate that a Pick Up  
operation is necessary.  
2. Depress the media keys, [VND CPN] or [FSTL TEND] key corresponding to the collected  
media ([AT/TL]for cash). The media keys that can be operated here are those programmed  
to printed their media-in-drawer amounts in reports.  
3. Depress [ST], if necessary, to obtain the subtotal amount of the medias so far collected.  
Pick Up Operation Sample:  
The manager comes to the register and collects the cash amount of  
$300.00 from the drawer:  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Mode Lock: MGR  
(must be in a signed-ON condition)  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
Depress [PO].  
Enter 30000, depress [AT/TL].  
Depress [AT/TL].  
*
P I C K U P  
*
CASH  
TOTAL  
$300.00  
$ 3 0 0 . 0 0  
JONES  
0243 18:47TM  
- 5 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
3.2. ENFORCED SIGN-OFF A CASHIER  
(CODE ENTRY METHOD)  
Each cashier signs-ON to start operations, signs-OUT for leaving the register for a while, signs-IN when  
comes back, and signs-OFF to end operations (refer to the OPERATOR’S GUIDE).  
However, when a cashier once signed-ON and then signed-OUT for taking a break does not come back (or  
the cashier may have operated a sign-OUT by mistake instead of a sign-OFF), the register cannot be  
operated. No one else can operate sign-OFF, either, because the same cashier must sign-IN first before  
sign-OFF. In this case, the manager may operate an Enforced Sign-OFF.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
In a Signed-OUT condition  
Mode Lock: MGR  
The 2 digit Cashier Code  
(manager-assign potion)  
[LOG/RECEIPT]  
… The same will result as the normal sign-OFF.  
(or [LOG])  
01 to 99  
The 2-digit code assigned to each cashier. As for the code opening and  
assigned cashier names, refer to the following:  
For verifying the code and the assigned cashier’s name:  
Chapter 7: VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
• CASHIER CODE AND NAME READ  
For programming or changing the cashier’s names or assigned codes:  
Chapter 6: PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
• CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING AND DELETION  
(Submode 2)  
-- Receipt Print Format --  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
*
S I G N O F F  
*
JONES  
0250 18:51TM  
- 6 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
4. OPERATIONS IN “ ” MODE  
Instead of using the [RTN MDSE] or [VOID] keys in the “REG” or “MGR” mode for deleting individual items,  
the “ ” mode automatically processes positive items into negative and negative into positive. To operate,  
turn the Mode Lock to the “ ” position using the MA key, and enter the items, one by one, just as in the  
“REG” mode, as reading the sale receipt (issued at the time of the purchase) or tracing the returned items  
as if in the “REG” mode. A positive balance resulted in the “ ” mode indicates the amount to be paid back  
to the customer.  
The “ ” mode operation may occur from time to time during day, on the cashier’s request, just as in the  
case of ordinary Manager Interventions, when a customer to the cashier counter to return or cancel all the  
items that he once purchased. In using this mode, please be certain to read the following three cases of  
operation patterns. If you only turn the Mode Lock to the “ ” position and let the cashier operate the actual  
item entries in this mode, you should also inform the cashier of these three cases.  
4.1. ORDINARY OPERATIONS IN “ ” MODE  
Except those described in the next sections 4.2. and 4.3., all the sale items that were entered in “REG” or  
“MGR” at the time of purchase may be entered in the “ ” mode in the same way as operated at the time  
of purchase.  
OPERATION AND RECEIPT SAMPLE  
RECEIPT ISSUED IN "REG"or "MGR"MODE  
RECEIPT ISSUED IN "  
"MODE  
These two receipts contain the same  
sale items and media finalization. The  
operations are also the same except the  
Mode Lock position.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Thecashiermerelyfollowsthepurchase  
receipt (on the left) and enters the same  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
items in the  
position, finalizing with  
the same media in case a customer has  
returnedorcanceledtheentiresaleafter  
the cashier had finalized that sale.  
VEGETABLE  
Cheese-HalfPck  
%+  
$2.50TF  
$2.50TF  
*
R E G -  
*
$2.50TF  
$2.50TF  
VEGETABLE  
Cheese-HalfPck  
%+  
The  
mode header (*REG-* in this  
5%  
-0.13T  
$0.30  
$ 5 . 1 7  
example) is printed at the top and the  
bottom of the sale contents in the  
mode receipt.  
TAX  
CASH  
5%  
-0.13T  
$0.30  
5 . 1 7  
TAX  
CASH  
ITEM  
2
JONES  
0252 18:51TM  
ITEM  
R E G -  
JONES  
2
*
*
0253 18:53TM  
4.2. CHARGE POSTING WITH CUSTOMER FILE  
(CHECK TRACK MEMORY) IN “ ” MODE  
When your register adopts the Customer File Memory type (instead of the PB Manual Entry type), the  
previous balance entry is different from that operated in the “REG” or “MGR” mode. Due to the memory  
process, this special operation is required. In case a customer cancels the entire sale once purchased in  
the charge posting mode, please be certain to operate as instructed on next page.  
- 7 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
(1) Operation in “REG” or “MGR” mode (at the purchase; refer to the OPERATOR’S GUIDE.)  
| Customer File Code* | [PICK UP BAL] (or [CODE OPEN])  
**  
The previous balances is  
recalled from the customer’s  
file memory.  
Entries of purchased items***  
([TXBL TL])  
[Chg]  
[TOTAL] … to transfer all balance with no payment  
| Payment Amount | [R/A] Finalization with Media keys  
****  
(2) Operation in “ ” mode (at the cancel or return of the above sale)  
| Customer File Code | [PICK UP BAL]  
Equivalent to *  
| Previous Balance | [AMT]  
Equivalent to **  
Entries of the returned items (equivalent to ***)  
[Chg]  
Balance Transfer or Payment operation (equivalent to ****)  
NOTE: Only the previous balance that was automatically recalled from menory in the “REG” or “MGR”  
mode must be entered manually through the [AMT] key in the “ ” mode.  
Other operations are identical to those operated in the “REG” or “MGR” mode. (Such items as  
% + and % - are also operated the same as entered at the time of purchase.)  
Mode Lock:  
REG or MGR  
RECEIPT AT RETURN  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
RECEIPT AT PURCHASE  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
3 (Custom File Code)  
P B +  
KAREN WALTERS  
VEGETABLE  
%-  
000000000003  
[PICK UP BAL]  
*
R E G -  
*
$6.42  
$6.00TF  
P B +  
KAREN WALTERS  
VEGETABLE  
%-  
000000000003  
3 (Custom Code)  
[PICK UP BAL]  
642 [AMT]  
600 [DEPT 1]  
$6.42  
$6.00TF  
10 [% –]  
10%  
-0.60  
$0.36  
$ 1 2 . 1 8  
TAX  
Chg  
10%  
-0.60  
$0.36  
$ 1 2 . 1 8  
(A)  
[Chg]  
Operated exactly the same  
as the sequence marked  
with “(A)” at purchase.  
TAX  
Chg  
TOTAL  
$ 1 2 . 1 8  
[TOTAL]  
TOTAL  
TOTAL  
$ 1 2 . 1 8  
ITEM  
1
$ 6 . 4 2  
The final new balance after  
correction in this operation  
(which should be equal to  
the balance called at the  
starting of the RECEIPT AT  
PURCHASE).  
ITEM  
1
*
R E G -  
*
SMITH  
0223 16:51TM  
As shown in the sample above, the previous balance $6.42 is entered manually through the [AMT] key on  
theright-handsidereceipt, whilethesamepreviousbalanceisautomaticallyrecalledbymerelydesignating  
the Customer File Code through the [PICK UP BAL] key on the left-hand side receipt.  
The print formats in both receipts are designed to be the same from Customer File Code down to the first  
“TOTAL” amount (resulting balance at the time of purchase.), except that the final new balance at the time  
of return is additionally printed (which will be the same amount of the balance before the purchase) and the  
“
” mode header is printed on the right-hand side receipt.  
- 8 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
4.3 SCALE ITEM ENTRY IN “ ” MODE  
Any scale item entered in the “REG” or “MGR” mode at the time of purchase must be entered manually  
(Manual Scale Entry but not Auto Scale) in the “ ” mode at the time of return or cancel.  
That is, for entering a scale item (once purchased) in the “ ” mode, you must read the written net weight  
on the item (if any) or read the net weight in the scale display panel by placing it on the scale platter, then  
enter the net weight value, manually in the procedure described as MANUAL SCALE ENTRY operation in  
the OPERATOR’S GUIDE.  
4.4. PROHIBITIVE OPERATIONS IN “ ” MODE  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NO-SALE ([NS])  
AUTO-SCALE (described in 4.3.)  
NO-SALE CASHING OF CHECK OR OTHER NON-CASH MEDIAS  
NO-SALE EXCHANGE from Foreign Currency to Domestic Currency, or vice versa  
LOAN  
PICK UP  
TRAINING MODE START/END  
VALIDATION PRINT  
ENDORSEMENT PRINT  
RECEIPT POST-ISSUE ([RECEIPT ISSUE])  
4.5. MANAGER INTERVENTION REQUIRED STATUS,  
AMOUNT LIMIT IN “ ” MODE  
Since operations in the “ ” mode are performed under the manager’s control, the status requiring a  
ManagerInterventionandAmountLimits(describedinChapter2)willallbereleased,i.e.,thesamehandling  
as in the “MGR” mode.  
- 9 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
5. READ (X) AND RESET (Z) REPORTS  
The following table shows the key operation to take each report. The “X” and “Z” reports have exactly the  
same print content if both are available, except that:  
1. The “X” reports allow to read the sales data but not clear memories, while the “Z” reports allow to  
read the sales data and at the same time all the resettable memories will be cleared when the  
reports have been issue.  
2. The symbol “X…” is printed on the top line of a Daily Read Report, “Z…” on a Daily Reset Report,  
“GTX…” on a GT Read Report, and “GTZ…” on a GT Reset Report, as initial settings.  
3. A reset count is printed on the bottom of a “Z” report only.  
WARNING!  
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.  
TABLE OF OPERATIONS FOR X AND Z REPORTS  
Daily Reports  
MODE  
LOCK  
SAMPLE  
PAGE  
REPORT NAME  
KEY OPERATION  
FINANCIAL READ AND RESET  
15  
•
•
Financial Read  
Financial Reset  
X
Z
3 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
CASHIER READ AND RESET  
17  
•
•
All Cashier Read  
All Cashier Reset  
X
Z
4 [ST] (Drawer opens.)  
•
•
Individual Cashier Read  
Individual Cashier Reset  
X
Z
Code Entry Method:  
4 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Cashier Key Method:  
Set the required Cashier Key  
(or depress the required Cashier  
Key), then 4 [#] [AT/TL]  
SALESPERSON READ AND RESET  
18  
18  
•
•
All Salesperson Read  
All Salesperson Reset  
X
Z
5 [AT/TL]  
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES READ  
AND RESET  
•
•
Credit Card Company Sales Read  
Credit Card Company Sales Reset  
X
Z
6 [AT/TL]  
DEPARTMENT GROUP READ  
X
8 [AT/TL]  
19  
20  
MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER TOTAL READ  
X
9 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
- 10 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Daily Reports (Continued)  
REPORT NAME  
MODE  
LOCK  
SAMPLE  
PAGE  
KEY OPERATION  
HOURLY RANGE READ AND RESET  
20  
•
•
Hourly Read  
Hourly Reset  
X
Z
10 [AT/TL]  
DEPARTMENT READ AND RESET  
21, 22  
•
Individual Department Read  
X
11 [#], then depress the required  
Dept. Keys (or use [DP #] key),  
one by one, [ST] may be used to  
obtain subtotal, [AT/TL] to end.  
•
•
All Department Read  
All Department Reset  
X
Z
11 [AT/TL]  
ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-DRAWER READ  
X
X
12 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
18  
PLU READ AND RESET  
*
23, 24  
•
Individual PLU Read  
13 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST]) fi [AT/TL]  
Repeatable  
* (May be replaced by [PLU Preset-code Key])  
13 [#] Zone-| [@/FOR] Zone-| [AT/TL]  
•
•
Zone PLU Read  
Zone PLU Reset  
X
Z
start  
PLU  
Code  
end  
PLU  
Code  
•
•
•
All PLU Read  
All PLU Reset  
Inactive PLU Read  
X
Z
X
13 [AT/TL]  
13 [#] 0 [AT/TL]  
ORDER TABLE READ AND RESET  
(for Drive-through spec. only)  
25  
26  
•
•
All Order Table Read  
All Order Table Reset  
X
Z
15 [AT/TL]  
CUSTOMER FILE READ AND RESET  
(for Check Track Memory type only)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
All Files Read  
All Files Reset  
Individual File Read  
Zone Files Read  
Zone Files Reset  
Zero-balance Files Read  
Credit-balance Files Read  
Debit-balance Files Read  
X
Z
X
X
Z
X
X
X
15 [AT/TL]  
15 [#] |Customer File Code| [@/FOR] [AT/TL]  
15 [#] |Zone-start File Code| [@/FOR] fi  
|Zone-end File Code| [AT/TL]  
15 [#] 0 [AT/TL]  
15 [#] 1 [AT/TL]  
15 [#] 2 [AT/TL]  
PLU GROUP SALES READ AND RESET  
27  
•
•
PLU Group Sales Read  
PLU Group Sales Reset  
X
Z
24 [AT/TL]  
- 11 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
GT Reports -- to be taken on weekly or monthly basis --  
MODE  
LOCK  
SAMPLE  
PAGE  
REPORT NAME  
KEY OPERATION  
(The Mode Lock position is the same as the corresponding Daily report. However, always add 200 to  
the numeric value for the report taking.)  
FINANCIAL GT READ AND RESET  
•
•
Financial GT Read  
Financial GT Reset  
X
Z
27  
27  
203 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
CASHIER GT READ AND RESET  
•
•
•
•
All Cashier GT Read  
X
Z
X
Z
204 [AT/TL] (Drawer opens.)  
All Cashier GT Reset  
Individual Cashier GT Read  
Individual Cashier GT Reset  
Code Entry Method:  
204 [#] |Cashier ID Code| [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Cashier Key Method:  
Set the required Cashier Key (or  
depress the required Cashier Key),  
then 204 [#] [AT/TL]  
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES GT READ  
AND RESET  
27  
X
Z
•
•
Credit Card Company Sales GT Read  
Credit Card Company Sales GT Reset  
206 [AT/TL]  
X
X
208 [AT/TL]  
27  
27  
DEPARTMENT GROUP READ  
DEPARTMENT GT READ AND RESET  
•
Individual Department GT Read  
211 [#], then  
depress the required Dept. Keys (or use  
[DP#] key), one by one, [ST] may be used  
to obtain subtotal, [AT/TL] to end.  
X
Z
•
•
All Department GT Read  
All Department GT Reset  
211 [AT/TL]  
PLU READ AND RESET  
*
X
•
Individual PLU GT Read  
213 [#] |PLU Code| [PLU] ([ST])  
27  
Repeatable  
[AT/TL]  
*(May be replaced by [PLU Preset-Key])  
Zone-  
start  
PLU  
Zone-  
end  
PLU  
Code  
X
Z
213 [#]  
[@/FOR]  
[AT/TL]  
•
•
Zone PLU GT Read  
Zone PLU GT Reset  
Code  
•
•
•
All PLU GT Read  
All PLU GT Reset  
Inactive PLU GT Read  
X
Z
X
213 [AT/TL]  
213 [#] 0 [AT/TL]  
PLU GROUP SALES GT READ AND RESET  
27  
•
•
PLU Group Sales GT Read  
PLU Group Sales GT Reset  
X
Z
224 [AT/TL]  
- 12 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Combination Reports  
Multiple reports can be programmed to be issued is one operation sequence. The following are reports  
programmable for combinations (max. 5 reports in one table, max. 3 tables). Ask your TOSHIBA TEC  
representative for information of the contents of your Combination Report Tables or for changes.  
REPORT NAME  
Financial Report  
AVAILABLE REPORTS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Z
Z
Z
Z
GTX GTZ  
GTX GTZ  
All Cashier Report  
All Salesperson Report  
Credit Company Sales Report  
Department Group Report  
Media Sales and In-drawer Report  
Hourly Range Report  
GTX GTZ  
GTX  
Z
Z
All Department Report  
GTX GTZ  
GTX GTZ  
GTX GTZ  
All Media Sales & Cash-in-drawer Report  
All PLU Report  
Z
Z
Z
All Order Tables Report (or Check Tracks Report)  
PLU Group Sales Report  
KEY OPERATION: Mode Lock:  
X for Read  
Z for Reset  
[AT/TL]  
Enter the Report Combination-ID No.:  
None (Simply depress [AT/TL]):  
Daily Combination Report Table No.1  
200: GT Combination Report Table No.1  
1: Daily Combination Report Table No.2  
201: GT Combination Report Table No.2  
2: Daily Combination Report Table No.3  
202: GT Combination Report Table No.3  
NOTES: 1. When the mode set for taking combination reports does not match the mode of a report  
contained in the table, that report will be skipped.  
2. If no combination reports data have been programmed, Combination Report Table No.1  
(which is issued by depressing the [AT/TL] key alone for Daily Reports and depressing 200  
[AT/TL] for GT Reports) is auto-preset with All Department Report and Financial Report. It  
will be active as table No.1 content unless no data are programmed for Table No.1.  
3. The report output order is determined by the order programmed in each table.  
4. The drawer will open when a cotained report is ruled to open the drawer.  
- 13 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
GENERAL NOTES ON REPORT TAKINGS  
1. The cashier signed-OFF or signed-OUT condition is required for taking any X or Z reports in the Code  
Entry Method. (Otherwise, an error will result when the Mode Lock is turned to the “X” or “Z” position.)  
However, in case of a standalone system with PC connected, X/Z reports can be taken during sign-ON  
and sales entries.  
2. Resetreportswillbeprintedonthereceiptrollaswellasonjournal,andissued,regardlessofthecurrent  
Receipt ON/OFF status.  
3. The [ITEM CORR] (or [VOID])key may be depressed halfway during printing a report, for the purpose  
to abort the receipt issuance (except for some short reports). When a report-abort has been operated  
for a reset report, the memory of the report data will not be cleared.  
4. The drawer will open at the starting of printing the reports which are stated with “(Drawer opens)” in the  
Daily and GT report table. However, the drawer may remain closed if so selected by a program option.  
This selection is applied only to the financial report.  
5. The sales data of the following read reports will be cleared when the relevant reset reports are cleared.  
If those read reports are necessary, please be certain to take them before the relevant reset reports  
are taken:  
READ REPORT  
RELEVANT RESET REPORT  
that clears the read report data  
(with no reset reports provided)  
Department Group Read  
All Department Reset  
Financial Reset  
Media Sales and In-drawer Total Read  
All Media Sales Total and Cash-in-drawer Read  
Inactive PLU Read  
Financial Reset  
PLU Reset  
Department Group GT Read  
Inactive PLU GT Read  
All Department GT Reset  
PLU GT Reset  
As you notice, “Financial Reset”, “All Department Reset”, and “PLU Reset” reports should be taken after all  
other reports (particularly read reports) on the respective levels of daily and GT, so that the required read  
reports data may not be cleared by those reset report takings.  
- 14 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
FINAL READ or RESET (Daily or GT)  
Mode Lock: X for read  
Enter 3, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily)  
Z for reset  
Enter 203, depress [AT/TL] (for GT)  
Reset Report Format Sample  
NOTES: 1. The numeric values placed in reports in this manual are merely  
examples to show the print format and may not balance correctly.  
2. The items attached with “*” outside the receipt frame are printed only  
on Daily Reports but not on GT Reports.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
3. The print or non-print status of each item on Financial Reports can be  
programmed.  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
4. Non-printing of items with zero sales (i.e., zero skip) can be  
programmed by a program option.  
Date, Day-of-Week,  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
Store/Register No.  
Z
F I N A N C I A L  
Report Name  
G T  
$346.77  
Grand Total (non-resettable)  
NET GT  
G S  
$309.09  
125  
$346.77  
112  
Net GT (non-resettable)  
Gross Sale Item Count  
& Amount  
<
Percent Charge I, II Count &  
N S  
Net Sale Without Tax Item Count  
Amount  
$300.48  
$17.20  
$0.50  
112  
& Amount  
Tax 1 Amount  
Manual Tax Amount  
Net Sale With Tax Item Count  
GST Amount  
<
<
TAX1  
TAX5  
N S  
Tax 2 to Tax 4 Amount  
$318.18  
1
$1.40  
4
$2.34  
1
$4.00  
1
& Amount  
Charge Tip  
Count & Amount  
<
<
<
HASH DP  
%-  
Total of Positive Departments programmed as OTHER INCOME, Item Count  
& Amount  
Percent Discount (on Subtotal) Count  
& Amount  
Vendor Coupon Count  
& Amount  
Dollar Discount (on Subtotal) Count  
& Amount  
Bottle Return Item Count  
& Amount  
All-media Sales (including CASH, FS TL, and PB TL)  
Customer Count & Amount  
Cash Sales  
Customer Count & Amount  
Check Sales  
Customer Count & Amount  
Total of Negative Departments programmed  
as OTHER INCOME, Item Count & Amount  
Percent Discount II (on Subtotal) Count & Amount  
if two Percent Discount keys are installed.  
V.CPN  
DISC  
BTR  
$1.00  
6
$0.35  
71CU  
$310.49  
71CU  
$292.77  
0CU  
$5.00  
1CU  
$12.72  
2
TOTAL  
CASH  
CHECK  
FS TL  
R/A  
<
Additional Media Sales data, if any  
Food Stamp Sales  
Customer Count & Amount  
Received-on Account Count  
& Amount  
$8.00  
8
PO  
Paid-Out Count  
$37.10  
$95.02  
2
$15.00  
1
$13.00  
$0.28  
& Amount  
<
<
*
CASH ID  
CHECK ID  
Cash-in drawer Amount  
Check in-drawer Count  
& Amount  
Food Stamp-in-drawer Count  
& Amount  
Loan Amount, Pick Up Count & Amount  
*
*
*
*
FSID  
Additional Media-in drawer data, if any  
FS CG  
Food Stamp Change Amount  
<
Tip Paid Count & Amount  
-- to be continued --  
- 15 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
(Financial Read or Reset)  
-- Continued --  
<
<
Eat-in Customer Count & Amount  
Takeout Customer Count & Amount  
Item Correct (on positive Depts/PLUs) Count  
& Amount  
Void Count  
& Amount  
All Void Count  
& Amount  
Percent Discount (on Line Items) Count  
& Amount  
Dollar Discount (on Line Items) Count  
& Amount  
Store Coupon Item Count  
& Amount  
CORR  
1
$1.00  
1
$1.00  
2
$8.60  
11  
$2.02  
4
$2.00  
2
$1.00  
4
$3.80  
$0.22  
4CU  
$5.37  
2
$7.95  
$0.03  
1CU  
$0.00  
$284.98  
$58.20  
2
$1.40  
1CU  
$5.00  
$10.00  
3
150.00  
1
5.68  
1
1.45  
18.00  
1.58  
$4.23  
3
VOID  
ALL VD  
%-  
<
<
Miscellaneous Void Count & Amount  
Percent Discount II (on Line Items) Count &  
Amount if two Percent Discount keys are  
installed.  
DISC  
S. CPN  
RTN  
<
Negative Departments Item Count & Amount  
Returned Merchandise Item Count  
& Amount  
Transfer GT Balance, Transfer+GT and  
Transfer-GT (These items are non-resettable)  
if the Check Track feature is selected.  
Negative Tax Amount  
Negative-balance Sales  
Customer Count & Amount  
Negative Mode ( Mode) Count  
& Amount  
Transfer - Daily  
Previous Balance Sales  
Customer Count & Amount  
-TAX  
-SALE  
REG-  
Transfer + Daily  
<
<
Previous Balance R/A and Previous Balance  
PO if the Check Track feature is selected.  
TRF-  
PB TL  
GST Taxable Total  
<
<
Taxable Total 1 (Sale Amount Portion subject to Tax 1 taxation)  
Taxable Total 2 (Sale Amount Portion subject to Tax 2 taxation)  
Selective Itemizer 1 Count  
TXBL1  
TXBL2  
SI1 TL  
<
Taxable Total 3,4  
& Amount calculated out or processed  
<
<
Selective Itemizer 2 Count & Amount  
FS EX1 to FS EX4 for Taxes exempted by  
tendering food stamps if ILLINOIS or NEW  
JERSEY type of food stamp system  
Tax Exempted Customer Count  
Sale Portion Exempted from GST  
Sale Portion Exempted from Tax 1  
TAX EX  
GST EX  
TAX1 EX  
CUR 1  
<
<
*
*
*
*
Sales Portion Exempted from Tax 2 to 4  
CUR 2  
CUR 3  
The amounts are expressed in the  
respective currencies’ units  
*
Foreign Currency Rounding Amount  
Foreign Currencies 4 &  
5-in-drawer data if  
opened.  
CUR RND  
ITEM/CUS  
NS/CUS  
NO SALE  
VALI CTR  
TRAY CTR  
Sales Item Count per Customer  
Net Sale Amount per Customer  
No-sale Count  
Validation Print Count  
Tray Total Operation Count  
*
*
*
*
2
1
Financial Reset Report Count (on Reset Reports only)  
0001Z  
0260 18:58TM  
- 16 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
CASHIER READ or RESET (Daily or GT)  
Mode Lock: X for read  
Z for reset  
Reset Report  
(1) All Cashiers:  
Format Sample  
Enter 4, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily).  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Enter 204, depress [AT/TL] (for GT).  
(2) Individual Cashier:  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Enter 4, depress [#], enter the Cashier ID Code (2 digits),  
and depress [AT/TL] (CODE ENTRY Method) (for Daily)  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
Z
C L E R K  
Set the required Cashier Key to ON, enter 4, depress [#]  
01 JONES  
G S  
and [AT/TL] (CASHIER KEY Method) (for Daily)  
125  
$346.77  
112  
$300.48  
Enter 204, depress [#], enter the Cashier ID Code (2 digits),  
N S  
and depress [AT/TL] (CODE ENTRY Method) (for GT)  
Set the required Cashier Key to ON, enter 204, depress [#]  
ITEM/CUS  
NS/CUS  
1.56  
$4.17  
and [AT/TL] (CASHIER KEY Method) (for GT)  
NO SALE  
TRAY CTR  
0001Z  
2
1
02 SMITH  
Cashier ID Code & Cashier’s Name  
In CASHIER SIGNING Method, the ID code here is the 2-digit  
manager-assign portion of the Cashier Code  
*
T R A I N I N G  
*
*
03 MEHL  
Same contents as Financial Reports except for GT and NET GT  
*
T R A I N I N G  
04 BROWN  
G S  
9
$22.80  
9
N S  
$21.50  
$1.30  
9
TAX1  
N S  
$22.80  
5CU  
$22.80  
$22.80  
$22.80  
$21.50  
1.80  
TOTAL  
CASH  
CASH ID  
TXBL1  
ITEM/CUS  
NS/CUS  
$4.30  
Individual Cashier Reset Report Count (on Reset Reports only)  
0001Z  
0261 18:58TM  
- 17 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DAILY SALESPERSON READ OR RESET  
(all Salespersons)  
Mode Lock: X for read  
Enter 5,  
depress [AT/TL]  
Z for reset  
TEC STORE  
Reset Report Sample  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
Z
S L S P E R S O N  
02 Stacy  
Person Code, Name  
G S  
2
Gross Sale Item Count  
& Amount  
$2.65  
2
$2.50  
2
$2.65  
0
$0.00  
Net Sale Without Tax, Item Count  
& Amount  
N S  
N S  
RTN  
Net Sale With Tax, Item Count  
& Amount  
Returned Merchandise Item Count  
& Amount  
All Salesperson Reset Report  
Count (on Reset Reports only)  
0001Z  
0267 19:00TM  
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES READ or  
RESET (Daily or GT)  
DAILY ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-  
IN-DRAWER READ (read only)  
(read only)  
Enter 6, depress  
[AT/TL] (for Daily)  
Enter 206, depress  
Mode Lock:  
X, enter 12, depress [AT/TL]  
Mode Lock: X for read  
Z for reset  
[AT/TL] (for GT)  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
X
M E D I A  
All-media Sales Total Customer  
Count, Amount  
Cash-in-drawer Amount  
TOTAL  
72CU  
$315.79  
$95.02  
X
C R E D I T  
Company Code, Name, Count  
& Sales Amount  
01 ABC  
1
CASH ID  
$5.30  
1
$5.30  
Total of all card companies’  
sales (Item Count & Amount)  
TOTAL  
0269 19:01TM  
0001Z  
Credit Card Co. Sales Reset  
Report Count (on Reset  
Reports only)  
0268 19:00TM  
- 18 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DEPARTMENT GROUP READ (Daily or GT)  
(read only)  
Mode Lock:  
X,  
Enter 8, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily).  
Enter 208, depress [AT/TL] (for GT).  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
X
G R O U P  
Minor Groups:  
Group Name, Item Count  
Sales Percentage & Amount  
V E & F R  
46.51%  
M E & F I  
9.17%  
D A I R Y  
12.41%  
B A K E R Y  
15.28%  
D A & B T  
14.06%  
D A & B L  
6.59%  
S N & S P  
6.07%  
O T H E R S  
1.06%  
41  
$153.20  
11  
$30.19  
20  
$40.89  
11  
$49.24  
15  
$46.30  
14  
$21.70  
2
$20.00  
2
$3.50  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TOTAL  
125  
$329.38  
Item Count  
Amount  
Total of  
all Minor Groups  
F R E S H  
72.22%  
M A N U F  
26.72%  
O T H E R  
1.06%  
83  
$237.88  
40  
$88.00  
2
Major Groups:  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
$3.50  
TOTAL  
125  
$329.38  
Item Count  
Amount  
Total of  
all Major Groups  
0270 19:01TM  
- 19 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DAILY MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER  
DAILY HOURLY RANGE READ or RESET  
TOTAL READ (read only)  
Enter10, depress  
[AT/TL]  
Mode Lock:  
X for read  
Z for reset  
Mode Lock:  
X, enter 9, depress [AT/TL]  
Reset Report Sample  
TEC STORE  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
X
M E D I A A L L  
Z
H O U R L Y  
8:01 to 12:00  
12:01 to 15:00  
15:01 to 19:00 Item Count  
Cus. Count & Amount  
19:01 and thereafter  
TOTAL  
CASH  
CHECK  
Chg  
72CU  
$315.79  
71CU  
$292.77  
0CU  
$5.00  
1CU  
All-media Sales Customer  
Count & Amount  
08:00TM  
12:00TM  
15:00TM  
72CU  
114  
$323.48  
19:00TM  
Each Media Sales  
Customer Count &  
Amount  
Hourly Range Reset Report Count  
(on Reset Reports only)  
0001Z  
$5.30  
1CU  
FS TL  
0272 19:01TM  
$12.72  
$95.02  
2
CASH ID  
CHECK ID  
$15.00  
1
$5.30  
1
Each Media-in -drawer  
Count & Amount  
Chg ID  
FS ID  
$13.00  
$0.28  
1CU  
$0.00  
3
150.00  
1
5.68  
1
Food Stamp Change  
Previous Balance Sales  
Customer Count & Amount  
Each Foreign Currency-in-drawer  
Count & Amount  
FS CG  
PB TL  
CUR1  
CUR2  
CUR3  
1.45  
0271 19:01TM  
- 20 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DEPARTMENT READ or RESET  
Mode Lock: X  
Enter 11 and depress [#] for Daily Report, or  
Enter 211 and depress [#] for GT Report  
Individual Department Read (Daily or GT)  
Operation for this  
sample report:  
Depress the required Dept Keys (or enter the required  
Dept Code and depress [DP#]), repeat this for other  
required DEPTs, depress [ST] if subtotal is necessary,  
depress [AT/TL] to end reading.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Model Lock: X  
11 [#] (for Daily)  
211 [#] (for GT)  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
X
D P I N D I V  
Department Name  
[DEPT: VEGETABLE]  
VEGETABLE  
Item Count  
32  
$95.20  
1
$0.50  
0
$0.00  
0
$0.00  
1
Customer Count (or Sales Percentage NOTE), Amount  
Dollar Discount or % - Count  
& Amount  
29.03%  
DISC  
Return Merchandise Item Count  
RTN  
The print or non-print  
status of each item is  
selected in a  
programming  
operation.  
& Amount  
Store Coupon Item Count  
& Amount  
Item Correct / Void Count  
& Amount  
Negative Mode Count  
S. CPN  
CORR  
REG-  
FRUIT  
$1.00  
2
$5.00  
& Amount  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
[DEPT: FRUIT]  
10  
$58.00  
0
17.68%  
DISC  
$0.00  
0
RTN  
$0.00  
0
$0.00  
0
S. CPN  
CORR  
$0.00  
0
REG-  
$0$00  
42  
$153.20  
42  
Item Count  
Amount  
Item Count  
Amount  
[ST]  
SUBTL  
TOTAL  
Subtotal of VEGETABLE + FRUIT  
Total of all departments read in this report  
[AT/TL]  
$153$20  
0273 19:02TM  
NOTE:  
A program option allows to select which of Customer Count and  
Sales Percentage is printed here.  
- 21 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
All Department Read or Reset (Daily or GT)  
Mode Lock: X for read  
Enter 11, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily).  
Z for reset  
Enter 211, depress [AT/TL] (for GT).  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Reset Report Sample  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
Department Data fl  
Dept. 1 Name,  
Item Count  
Customer Count (or Sales %), Amount  
Dollar Disc. or % - Count  
& Amount  
Returned Merchandise Item Count  
& Amount  
Store Coupon Count  
& Amount  
Z
D P A L L  
VEGETABLE  
33  
$101.20  
1
$0.50  
0
$0.00  
0
$0.00  
1
30.30%  
DISC  
RTN  
S. CPN  
CORR  
REG-  
Item Correct / Void Count  
& Amount  
$1.00  
2
$5.00  
Negative Mode Count  
.
& Amount  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
D P 15  
Dept. 15 Data:  
1
$1.00  
0
$0.00  
0
DISC  
RTN  
$0.00  
0
$0.00  
0
$0.00  
0
S. CPN  
CORR  
REG-  
$0.00  
TOTAL  
126  
$333.98  
Item Count  
Amount  
of departments  
V E & F R  
47.47%  
M E & F I  
9.00%  
42  
$159.20  
11  
$30.19  
20  
Minor Group and Major Group Data fl  
Refer to Department Group Read Report for details.  
D AIRY  
12.19%  
B AKERY  
4.06%  
C A & B T  
12.19%  
D R & B L  
6.47%  
$40.89  
11  
$13.60  
24  
$40.89  
14  
$21.70  
- 22 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU (PLU SALES DATA) READ or RESET  
Individual PLU Read (Daily or GT)  
Mode Lock: X  
Enter 13 [#] for Daily Report, or  
Enter 213 [#] for GT Report .  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Enter the PLU code, depress [PLU]. (Repeat this step if necessary.)  
Depress [ST] for subtotal.  
Depress [AT/TL] to end.  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
OPERATION FOR THIS  
SAMPLE REPORT:  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
Mode Lock: X  
13 [#]  
20102 [PLU]  
X
P L U I N D I V  
020102  
Lemon  
1
$1.00  
020105  
Apple  
0
20105 [PLU]  
$0.00  
1
$1.00  
SUBTL  
[ST] to obtain subtotal  
of the above two PLUs.  
TOTAL  
1
[AT/TL] to end  
$1.00  
0297 19:13TM  
Zone PLU Read or Reset (Daily or GT)  
Read Report Sample  
TEC STORE  
Mode Lock: X  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Enter 13 [#] for Daily Report, or  
Enter 213 [#] for GT Report.  
Enter the zone-start PLU code, depress [@/FOR].  
Then enter the zone-end PLU code, depress [AT/TL].  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
For this sample  
13 [#] (for Daily)  
100000 [@/FOR]  
199999 [AT/TL]  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
X
P L U Z O N E  
100000~199999  
Zone-start PLU Code ~ Zone-end PLU Code  
PLU Code  
101301  
Small-Btl Depo  
4
PLU Name  
$0.20  
Item Count, Amount  
Item Count, Amount of Total of all PLUs read in this report  
TOTAL  
4
$0.20  
0276 19:05TM  
NOTE: In Zone PLU Read Reports:  
•
•
PLUs of zero sale will be skipped.  
PLUs not existing in the PLU Program File memory will not be printed in reports  
(in any reports).  
- 23 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
All PLU Read or Reset (Daily or GT)  
INACTIVE PLU READ (Daily or GT) (read only)  
Mode Lock: X or Z  
Mode Lock: X  
13 [#] (Daily), or  
213 [#] (GT).  
13 [AT/TL] (for Daily),  
or 213 [AT/TL] (for GT)  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Enter 0 (zero), depress  
Reset Report Sample  
[AT/TL].  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Prints data in order from  
lower to larger numbered  
PLU Code.  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
Z
P L U A L L  
Z
P L U Z E R O  
PLU Code 10101  
Name “Tomato”  
010101  
Tomato  
010102  
Potato  
020101  
Orange  
020105  
Apple  
030301  
Beef  
030302  
Pork  
030303  
Mutton  
040201  
Salmon  
040202  
Cod  
040203  
Shrimp  
050302  
Milk-Small Pack  
PLU Code  
Name  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Item Count, Amount  
3
$0.50  
$1.00  
$1.30  
$32.50  
$1.50  
$0.80  
$4.20  
$1.20  
$2.20  
$1.20  
$0.20  
.
.
.
.
.
020102  
Lemon  
NOTE:  
1
When a scaled item is  
entered, the item count “1”  
is processed into the Total  
Item Count of all the PLUs  
to be printed at the bottom,  
regardless of its actual  
weight volume.  
050301  
Milk-Large Pack  
1
050321  
Cheese-Half Pck  
13  
050322  
.
.
.
.
.
Egg-6 Pack  
1
060404  
Half Rolls-4  
1
070501  
Tuna Can  
12  
070502  
0278 19:06TM  
Soup Can  
4
080502  
Kiwi Jam  
1
090601  
Coke-Small-B  
2
PLU Code 101301  
101301  
Small-Btl Depo  
4
.
.
.
.
.
.
Total Item Count and  
TOTAL  
0001Z  
43  
$46.60  
Amount of all the PLUs  
PLU Reset Report Count  
(on Reset Reports only)  
0277 19:06TM  
- 24 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DAILY ORDER TABLE READ OR RESET (All Order Tables) (for Drive-through spec. only)  
Mode Lock: X for read  
Enter 15, depress [AT/TL]  
Z for reset  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Reset Report Sample  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
Z
#01  
O R D E R A L L  
Order Table No.  
Net Sale with Tax, Item Count  
& Amount  
3
$3.24  
#02  
4
$9.11  
6
#03  
$7.28  
All Order  
Tables Reset  
0001Z  
Report Count  
(On Reset Reports only)  
0280 19:10TM  
- 25 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
CUSTOMER FILE READ (for Check Track Memory Type only)  
All Files (with balance remaining)  
Read or Reset  
Zero-balance Files Read  
Mode Lock:  
X
Mode Lock: X for read  
Enter 15, depress [#].  
Enter 0 (zero), depress  
[AT/TL].  
Z for reset  
Enter 15, depress  
[AT/TL]  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
X
C U S T Z E R O  
X
C U S T A L L  
Customer’s Name  
File Code  
Balance  
(In this case, this is the  
only file with any balance  
remaining.)  
Customer’s Name  
File Code  
HELEN REED  
#000000000105  
JAMES HAILY  
#000000000001  
$4.70  
0071 15:40TM  
0068 15:37TM  
Credit-balance Files Read  
Individual Files Read  
TEC STORE  
Mode Lock:  
X
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Mode Lock:  
X
Enter 15, depress [#].  
Enter the required File  
Code, depress [@/FOR]  
Depress [AT/TL] to end.  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Enter 15, depress [#].  
Enter 1, depress  
[AT/TL].  
.
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
X
C U S T I N D I V  
X
C U S T C R E D  
Customer’s Name  
File Code  
Balance  
Customer’s Name  
File Code  
Balance  
HELEN REED  
#000000000105  
JAMES HAILY  
#000000000001  
$0.00  
$4.70  
0069 15:39TM  
0072 15:41TM  
Debit-balance Files Read  
TEC STORE  
Zone Files Read or Reset  
TEC STORE  
Mode Lock:  
X
Mode Lock: X for read  
Z for reset  
Enter 15, depress [#].  
Enter 2, depress  
[AT/TL].  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Enter 15, depress [#].  
Enter the zone-start File  
Code, depress [@/FOR].  
Then enter the zone-end  
File Code, depress  
[AT/TL].  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
In this case no debit-  
balance files are found at  
present.  
X
C U S T D E B I T  
X
C U S T Z O N E  
Zone-start File Code  
~ Zone-end File Code  
Customer’s Name  
File Code  
000000000001  
0073 15:42TM  
~000000000005  
JAMES HAILY  
#000000000001  
Balance  
$4,70  
(In this case, there is only  
one file with a balance in  
the designated zone.)  
0070 15:40TM  
- 26 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU GROUP SALES READ or RESET (Daily or GT)  
Mode Lock: X for read  
Enter 24, depress [AT/TL] (for Daily).  
Enter 224, depress [AT/TL] (for GT).  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
Z for reset  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Reset Report Format Sample  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
19-12-1994 MON #3001  
Z
P L U G R O U P  
PLU Group Name  
Item Count  
VEGETABLE  
4
Sales Percentage, Amount  
3.22%  
$1.50  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
MEAT & DAIRY  
15  
$35.30  
75.75%  
BAKERY  
1
1.72%  
$0.80  
CAN & BTL FOOD  
17  
16.31%  
DRINK  
$7.60  
1
2.58%  
$1.20  
BTL DEPO  
4
0.43%  
TOTAL  
$0.20  
43  
$46.60  
PLU Group Sales Reset Report Count (on Reset Reports only)  
0001Z  
0279 19:07TM  
GT REPORTS  
The print form and item of a GT report are same as those of its corresponding daily report, except the report  
header portion. Please also note that some items provided in the daily report are not provided in its GT  
reports. The counters and totals in a GT report are records accumulated for a certain period (week, month,  
etc.) While those counters and totals in the daily report are usually records for a day. The accumulated  
record data in each GT report will be renewed when its GTZ report has been taken.  
Header Example  
X
DP ALL  
GTX  
DP  
ALL  
All Department Read Report  
(Daily)  
All Department GT Read Report  
- 27 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
6. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
This chapter is provided for the store programmer or the store manager who may have to change the  
programmed data of the FS-1650 series ECR on the daily, weekly, or monthly basis. Usually, all the  
basic program data required for your store should be set before delivering the product by your local  
TOSHIBA TEC representative. However, in need of changing or adding program data, please refer to  
this chapter. It is also recommended to read the OPERATOR’S GUIDE as well as other chapters of the  
MANAGER’S GUIDE in order to thoroughly understand the descriptions in this chapter. If there are any  
unclear points or program data other than listed here must be changed or added, please contact your  
TOSHIBA TEC representative.  
TABLE OF PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
(page)  
-- BASIC KEY FUNCTIONS AND KEYBOARD VARIATIONS IN PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS -- ... 29  
-- CHARACTER ENTRIES -- ................................................................................................................ 30  
-- CONDITION REQUIRED FOR PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS -- ................................................. 37  
Submode No. 1:  
Submode No. 2:  
Submode No. 4:  
Submode No. 5:  
Submode No. 6:  
Submode No. 8:  
STORE NAME/MESSAGE AND COMMERCIAL MESSAGE PROGRAMMING .. 38  
CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING .................................................. 40  
PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING .............................................................................. 43  
TIME SETTING OR ADJUSTMENT...................................................................... 51  
DATE SETTING OR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................... 51  
AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING FOR FUNCTION KEYS ............................................. 52  
Submode No. 15: CUSTOMER FILE CODE (CHECK TRACK NO.) AND NAME SETTING............. 53  
Submode No. 20: SALESPERSON CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING ....................................... 55  
Submode No. 26: TARE TABLE AND GENERAL UNIT WEIGHT SETTING .................................... 57  
Submode No. 27: PLU PRESET- CODE KEY SETTING................................................................... 58  
Submode No. 31 DISPLAY MESSAGE PROGRAMMING................................................................ 60  
Submode No. 35 NEGATIVE AMOUNT KEY LIMIT AMOUNT SETTING ........................................ 62  
Submode No. 42 SET MENU TABLE PROGRAMMING................................................................... 63  
No Submode No.: DEPARTMENT PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING ............................... 64  
PLU PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING, WHOLE PACKAGE QUANTITY CHANGING........ 65  
%+ AND %- PRESET RATE SETTING................................................................. 67  
PRESET RATE SETTING FOR SELECTIVE ITEMIZERS ................................... 68  
FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE SETTING ........................................ 70  
TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING .............................................................................. 72  
GST RATE SETTING ............................................................................................ 75  
STORE/REGISTER NO. SETTING....................................................................... 76  
- 28 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
BASIC KEY FUNCTIONS AND KEYBOARD VARIATIONS IN  
PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
Basic Key Functions  
1. The following are main keys and their functions to be used in programming operations:  
[X] or [@/FOR] .... Used to enter the program Submode No. The [X] key is usually labeled as [@/  
FOR] on the ECR keyboard.  
[ST] ...................... Used to enter the Address No. or Item Code. Also used to end the item data  
entries.  
[#] ........................ Used to enter data for the address or item. Each character code is also entered  
through this key.  
[AT/TL] ................ Used to end the entire program Submode sequence.  
2. Functions of the [C] key:  
•
•
When an entered program data is already printed, the [C] key cannot clear it any longer. To correct  
the data, re-enter it.  
Before the entered data is printed, the data may be cleared by the [C] key.  
Keyboard Variations in Programming operations  
The FS-1650 adopts a Flat keyboard.  
The Flat keyboard will be set with the “Setting Mode Key Layout” in the programming operations  
including the character entries.  
The following operations may be executed with the “Setting Mode Key Layout.”  
• STORE NAME/MESSAGE AND COMMERCIAL MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Submode 1)  
• CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 2)  
• PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4)  
• CUSTOMER FILE CODE (CHECK TRACK No.) AND NAME SETTING (Submode 15)  
• SALESPERSON CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 20)  
• DISPLAY MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Submode 31)  
However, other operations (Which do not contain the character entries) should be operated with the  
ordinary “REG” mode key layout.  
NOTES: 1.  
If an option keyboard (TKB-1 or PK-2) is connected, the DIRECT CHARACTER  
ENTRY method is allowed through both the ECR keyboard and the option keyboard.  
2.  
Any character not found in “Setting Mode Key Layout” should be programmed by  
following the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY procedure. (Characters on the key sheet  
can also be programmed by following this procedure.)  
– 29 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
CHARACTER ENTRIES  
As already stated, there are two method of operations for character settings for names or messages:  
CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method and DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method.  
CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method  
This method is to set a character by entering a Character Code and depressing the [#] key.  
This method is allowed only on the ECR keyboard.  
DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY Method  
This method is to set a character by directly depressing the Character Key on any of the following  
keyboard:  
•
•
•
Flat Keyboard with “Setting Mode Key Layout” sheet.  
TKB-1 Keyboard (Programming Keyboard; hardware option)  
PK-2 Keyboard (PLU Keyboard; hardware option)  
By using those character keys, the characters are directly entered. In this manual sample operations  
are attached to most of the programming operations. And at name or message programming  
portions, characters are entered by the DIRECT CHARACTER ENTRY method.  
On the following pages, Character Code Tables under the CHARACTER CODE ENTRY Method and  
threedifferentkeyboardsundertheDIRECTCHARACTERENTRYMethodareshown. Thesepages  
aretobereferredto,everytimethe“CharacterEntries”sequenceiscontainedinvariousprogramming  
operations in this manual.  
Read through these pages at least once first, so that you may know the appropriate method of  
character entries using the ECR keyboard and/or option keyboards.  
– 30 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Character Code Entry Method  
Character Code Table 1: Standard Characters  
Column Code  
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
6
`
7
p
q
r
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
á
é
í
Å
å
\
→
←
↓
Row  
Code  
!
"
#
$
%
&
′
a
b
c
d
e
f
ll  
°
Ø
ø
lll  
II  
s
t
ó
ú
â
ê
î
↑
1
—
Æ
æ
Œ
œ
ß
2
`
1
—
4
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
•
D
Ä
Ë
Ö
Ü
É
ä
★
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
ô
û
à
è
ì
kg  
lb  
)
¢
∗
+
,
J
j
£
No  
×
;
K
L
k
l
Φ
∑
÷
<
=
>
?
¥
|
ë
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ï
ç
Ñ
ñ
.
^
_
~
ö
ü
–
–
/
– 31 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Character Setting Operations:  
•
To set a regular-sized character, entry the COL (column) code and then the ROW code, followed  
by the [#] key.  
ex.)  
To set “%”, enter 205 and depress [#].  
To set “kg”, enter 1508, and depress [#].  
To set a blank instead of a character, simply depress [#] without a prior code entry, or enter 200  
and depress [#].  
Depress the [X] (or [@/FOR]) key once prior to a regular-sized character entry and it will be a  
double-sized character (a blank will also be double-sized).  
ex.)  
To set “GROUP”, “G” in double-sized, and “ROUP” in regular-sized:  
[X] 407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#]  
G
R
O
U
P
•
Depress the [X] key twice prior to the first character code entry to set the entire message line or  
entry name with all double-sized characters.  
ex.)  
To set “GROUP” all in double-sized:  
[X] [X] 407 [#] 502 [#] 415 [#] 505 [#] 500 [#]  
G
R
O
U
P
All Double-sized Declaration  
– 32 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Direct Character Entry Method  
Using Flat Keyboard (installed as the ECR Main Keyboard):  
-- Setting Mode Key Layout --  
(Use the special template for this purpose and insert it between the film layers covering the Flat Keyboard.  
This key layout is applicable to only certain submodes.)  
Character Keys in  
programming  
Function Keys in  
programming  
ITEM  
CORR  
ALL  
VOID  
¢
y
!
@
w
s
#
e
d
c
$
r
%
t
&
u
j
(
o
l
)
p
"
'
RF  
NS  
JF  
q
a
z
i
~
^
+
=
f
g
b
h
k
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
X
9
6
3
.
C
–
-
x
v
n
m
7
4
1
0
8
5
DP#  
#
Q
A
Z
W
S
E
D
C
R
F
V
T
G
B
Y
H
N
U
J
I
K
O
L
.
P
;
[
:
]
,
ST  
2
PLU  
AT/TL  
X
M
SPACE  
/
?
00  
Character Keys: Simply depress the key to enter the character. (The [#] key should not  
follow.) The numerics 1 to 0 are entered as characters 1 to 0 but not as  
codes for PLU Item Codes, etc.  
The One Double-size Declaration (by depressing [X] key once prior to the  
required character and the All Double-size Declaration (by depressing [X]  
twice before the characters) are the same as in the CHARACTER CODE  
ENTRY method.  
Function Keys:  
These are function keys to be used in programming operations with the  
Setting Mode Key Layout. The Numeric Keys here are used to enter PLU  
Codes, etc. or numeric values as program data, but not to enter the  
numerics as characters.  
– 33 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Using TKB-1 (Programming Keyboard; hardware option)  
SFT1  
SFT2  
SFT3  
SFT4  
! ?  
1
II £  
2
#
* $  
4
%
5
&
’ :  
7
[ /  
8
] +  
9
- =  
0
CLEAR  
[X]  
3
6
Q Ä  
A ä  
WÖ  
S ö  
X ê  
E Ü  
D ü  
C ç  
R Æ  
F æ  
Vé  
T Œ  
F œ  
B è  
Y Å  
H å  
N ú  
U Ñ  
J ñ  
M á  
I D  
K ß  
, í  
O
P
CODE  
AT/TL  
ST  
L Ø  
. ó  
SFTLOCK Z â  
SPACE  
C
h
a
r
a
c
te  
r
K
e
y
s
Shift Keys and  
Function Keys  
Shift Lock Key  
Shift Keys (1 to 4), Shift Lock Key  
Used to designate the shift of the character keys. Each character has three different characters, each  
of which is designated by the Shift Key 1 to Shift Key 3. (The Shift Key 4 is not used for the FS-1650  
series models.)  
Shift Key 2 and Shift Key 3 are effective for one following character only. After that, the Shift 1 mode is  
automatically regained.  
The Shift Lock Key is used to hold the shifted status for a series of characters. To change the shifted  
status locked by the Shift Lock Key, one of the Shift Keys (1 to 3) must by pressed prior to the character  
key depression.  
Character Keys  
Used to enter alpha/numerics as characters. In setting a name or message, simply depress the  
corresponding character key here, instead of the ECR keyboard.  
ex.)  
A ä  
"A" is entered in the Shift 1 mode.  
Operate: ([SFT 1]) → [A ä]  
"a" is entered in the Shift 2 mode.  
Operate: [SFT 2] → [A ä]  
"ä" is entered in the Shift 3 mode.  
Operate: [SFT 3] → [A ä]  
The numeric keys [1] through [0] (on the second row from the top) are used as character keys (i.e. the  
entered number will be part of the name or message to be printed).  
Also note that those numeric keys may be entered in the Shift 1,2 or 3 mode.  
– 34 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Function Keys  
Except for the [CODE] key, each of the function keys corresponds to the identical key installed on the  
ECR keyboard as to the function in programming operations. ([CLEAR] = [C],[X] = [@/FOR])  
The [CODE] key cannot be used for the FS-1650 series ECRs.  
Operation Examples  
To set the Menu Item name “COFFEE” for Dept. 2:  
USING TKB-1 KEYBOARD  
3 [X] [DEPT 2] 2 [ST]  
C O F F E E [ST] [AT/TL]  
on ECR  
on TKB-1 on ECR or TKB-1  
The “One Double size Declaration” (by depression [X] once prior to the required character) and the “All  
Double-size Declaration” (by depression [X] twice before the entire descriptor) are the same as in setting  
characters on the ECR keyboard.  
Any characters not listed on the TKB-1 keyboard may be entered by the code entry method on the ECR  
keyboard.  
– 35 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Using PK-2 (PLU Keyboard; hardware option)  
The PK-2 is used to enter a required PLU code by simply depressing the code-preset key on the PK-2  
keyboard in the REG or MGR mode. In addition, the PK-2 can be used to enter characters directly during  
the programming operations that require character settings, such as STORE NAME/MESSAGE AND  
COMMERCIAL MESSAGE PROGRAMMING, PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING, etc.  
The figure below shows the key indications of the PK-2 keyboard for the character setting purpose. Insert  
the template for this purpose between the film layers that cover the PK-2 keyboard.  
Instead of entering a 3- or 4-digit character code and depressing the [#] key on the ECR keyboard, a simple  
depression of the appropriate key on the PK-2 keyboard will be the character entry.  
All the function keys, such as [X], [ST], [AT/TL], etc. must be operated on the ECR side. Any characters  
notlistedonthetemplatemaybeenteredbytheCHARACTERCODEENTRYmethodontheECRkeyboard  
(the characters even listed on the template may be entered as well by that method).  
Please note also that keys “0” to “9” in the figure below function as character keys but do not function for  
code entries. Any code entries, for Menu Item Codes, Address Nos, etc. must be entered through the  
Numeric Keys on the ECR keyboard.  
The One Double-size Declaration (by depressing the [X] key once prior to the required character) and the  
All Double-sized Declaration (by depressing [X] twice before all the characters) are the same as in the  
CHARACTER CODE ENTRY method.  
7
4
1
8
5
2
0
^
+
=
]
9
6
3
)
p
"
(
o
l
!
@
w
s
#
e
$
r
%
t
c
y
&
u
*
i
q
a
z
~
_
-
d
f
g
h
j
k
´
x
c
v
R
F
V
b
n
m
U
J
P
;
O
L
.
Q
A
Z
W
S
X
E
D
C
T
G
B
Y
H
N
I
[
K
:
,
/
M
space  
?
– 36 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
CONDITION REQUIRED FOR PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
At the top of each programming operation a “CONDITION” is given. Unless the register satisfies condition,  
the programming operations will not be allowed.  
There are two types of conditions:  
“Any time outside a sale”  
It means that the programming operation is allowed when a sale is finalized before going into any  
other sale entry.  
“After … Reset”  
It means that the designated reset report must be taken before entering the programming operation.  
And an error will result if the operation is attempted without taking the report. However, the words  
“After … Reset” do not necessarily mean “immediately after …”.  
When the designed reset report has already been taken and then some operations are performed in  
the SET, X or Z mode, the condition “After … Reset” is still satisfied and the programming operation  
is still allowed.  
On the contrary, when the designated reset report has been taken but then some sales data relating  
to that report’s output data are entered in the REG, MGR, or  
mode, the programming operation  
will no longer be allowed and the same reset report must be taken.  
Thus the condition “After … Reset” indicates that all the sales data relating to the report data must  
bezero(exceptnon-resettablememorydata). Becauseofthis“CONDITION”requirement, thereport  
data will be protected from any inconsistencies of sales data entered in the period from a resetting  
of the report to another resetting of the same report next time.  
– 37 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
STORE NAME/MESSAGE AND COMMERCIAL MESSAGE  
PROGRAMMING (Submode 1)  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Repeat for another line.  
1 [X]  
| Line No. | [ST]  
(For sequentially  
programming lines, the line  
number specification can be  
skipped.)  
1 to 4:  
(See NOTE 2  
or  
Submode No.  
below.)  
5 to 7:  
Character Entries  
max. 24 characters/line  
[ST]  
To complete this line  
[AT/TL]  
(See CHARACTER ENTRIES  
at the beginning of this  
chapter.)  
To complete this  
programming  
operation  
NOTES:  
1. For each line, a maximum of 24 regular-size characters or 12 double-sized characters  
may be entered. A combination of both types is also available.  
2. Even if the option “Store Name Print by RUBBER STAMP” is selected, data can be  
programmed for the store name/message. However, the Rubber Stamp, instead of the  
programmed name/message will actually be printed for operations to issue receipts.  
Iftheoption“StoreNamePrintbyDOTPRINTER”isselected,use1through4forthestore  
name/message and 5 through 7 for the commercial message data, as Line No.  
The range Line Nos. 5 to 7 is unavailable to a manual-cut printer.  
3. If no commercial message is required on the receipt, program blanks for all three lines.  
As a result no extra lines will be fed. If any one of the three lines is programmed, the two  
other lines will cause line feeds.  
4. The 4-line range assigned for the store name/message will be either printed or fed,  
regardless of any system option selection.  
5. If any incorrect characters have been programmed, depress the [C] key to clear all the  
characters on a line and then re-enter characters from the beginning, or end the line with  
an [ST] and re-program the entire line. The new data will be active.  
6. When all the lines have been programmed, do a check by issuing receipt. Only the lines  
with errors need to be re-programmed; other lines will not be affected.  
– 38 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ex.) To program the following draft as the Store Name/Message and Commercial Message (under the  
option “Store Name by DOT PRINTER”):  
T
E
C
S
O
E
T
R
Line No. 1  
Line No. 2  
Line No. 3  
Line No. 4  
Line No. 5  
Line No. 6  
Store Name/  
Message portion,  
which can be  
replaced by a  
RUBBER STAMP  
print under the  
option “Store Name  
by RUBBER  
1 3 4 3  
P E A C H  
D R I V E  
P H O N E  
:
8 7 - 6 4 3 7  
STAMP”.  
7 : 0 0 p m  
W e d n e s d a y  
O p e n  
8 : 0 0 a m  
e v e r y  
t o  
Commercial  
Message portion.  
C l o s e d :  
Line No. 7  
OPERATION:  
Presumed that nothing has been programmed on each line.  
Mode Lock: SET; enter 1, depress [X].  
1 [ST] (Line No.1)  
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
[X] T  
(3 [ST]) (Line No. 3)  
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
[X] E  
[SPACE]  
[X] C  
P
H
O
N
E
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
[X] S  
[X] T  
[X] O  
[X] R  
11-14-1994 MON #1  
[SPACE]  
[X] E  
8
7
-
P 0 1  
[ST] (to complete Line 1)  
1
6
4
3
7
(2 [ST]) (Line No.2)  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
0007  
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
1
3
4
3
[SPACE]  
P
E
A
2
3
5
6
[ST] (to complete Line 3)  
5 [ST] (Line No.5)  
O
p
e
n
[SPACE]  
C
[ST] (to complete Line 5)  
H
[SPACE]  
D
R
I
V
E
(6 [ST]) (Line No.6)  
C
l
o
s
[ST] (to complete Line 2)  
[ST] (to complete Line 6)  
[AT/TL] to complete this  
submode.  
– 39 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
CASHIER CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 2)  
Programming  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
| Cashier Code | [NS]  
2 [X]  
(See NOTE 1 below.)  
Submode No.  
For Address 1: Cashier Name  
Character Entries  
(max. 12 characters)  
1 [ST]  
[ST]  
For Address 2: Cashier Name  
2 [ST]  
| Cashier Status | [#]  
0: Cashier for Sale Entries  
1: Cashier for Training Entries  
Repeat for another  
cashier.  
For sequentially programming the  
address, the Address number  
specification can be skipped.  
[AT/TL]  
NOTES:  
1. The following table shows the Cashier Codes that can be entered. (The capacity is  
determined by the RAM Allocation Setting.)  
Standard Memory Expansion Memory  
Code Entry Type  
1 to 15  
1 to 99  
Cashier  
Key Type  
Push-stay  
[CLK] key  
1 to 4, 99*  
1 to 8, 99*  
---  
---  
*
The Cashier Code 99 for the Cashier Key Type is fixed as a code of a cashier for  
Training Entries.  
2. For the name of each cashier, a maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized  
characters can be entered. A combination of both types is also available.  
3. When adopting the Push-stay Cashier Key, the cashier key “OFF” status is required for  
this programming.  
– 40 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ex.)  
To program the following cashier data:  
Cashier Code 1: Name JONES, Status 0 (for Sale Entries)  
Cashier Code 2: Name SMITH, Status 0 (for Sale Entries)  
Cashier Code 3: Name MEAL, Status 1 (for Training Entries)  
Cashier Code 4: Name BROWN, Status 1 (for Training Entries)  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 2, depress [X].  
Enter 1, depress [NS] (Cashier Code)  
Enter 1, depress [ST] (Address 1: Name)  
J
O
N
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
E
S
Depress [ST] (to end Name setting)  
(Enter 2, depress [ST] ) (Address 2: Status)  
Enter 0, depress [#] (for Sales Entries)  
11-14-1994 MON #1  
P 0 2  
01  
#01  
#02  
02  
#01  
#02  
03  
#01  
#02  
04  
#01  
#02  
00004  
JONES  
SMITH  
MEHL  
Enter 2, depress [NS] (Cashier Code)  
0
0
1
1
Enter 1, depress [ST] (Address 1: Name)  
S
H
Depress [ST] (to end Name setting)  
(Enter 2, depress [ST]) (Address 2: Status)  
Enter 0, depress [#] (for Sales Entries)  
BROWN  
Enter 3, depress [NS] (Cashier Code)  
Enter 1, depress [ST] (Address 1: Name)  
M
0016  
L
Depress [ST] (Address 2: Status)  
(Enter 2, depress [ST]) (Adress 2: Status)  
Enter 1, depress [#] (for Training Entries)  
Enter 4, depress [NS] (Cashier Code)  
Enter 1, depress [ST] (Address 1: Name)  
B
N
Depress [ST] (to end Name setting)  
(Enter 2, depress [ST]) (Address 2: Status)  
Enter 1, depress [#] (for Training Entries)  
Depress [AT/TL] to end this submode.  
– 41 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
After the Daily and GT Cashier’s Resets, (and his/her Sign OFF for Code Entry Type)  
Mode Lock: SET  
OPERATION  
Repeatable for another cashier to be deleted.  
2 [X]  
[ITEM CORR]  
| Cashier Code | [NS]  
[AT/TL]  
Submode No.  
NOTES:  
1. The Cashier Reset Report Count of the deleted cashier will be cleared.  
2. The cashier key or cashier code of the deleted cashier cannot be used or signed-ON for  
sale entries.  
ex.) To delete Cashier Code 1 with name “JONES” that has  
been programmed in the preceding page:  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Mode Lock: SET  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Enter 2, depress [X].  
Depress [ITEM CORR] (for declaration of deletion)  
11-14-1994 MON #1  
Enter 1, depress [NS] (Cashier Code)  
P 0 2  
01 JONES  
------------------------  
Depress [AT/TL] to end this program.  
0017  
– 42 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4)  
This submode can be operated when new PLU items are to be added, PLU program data is to be  
changed, or PLUs are to be deleted.  
Programming or Changing  
To program new PLUs or to change any programmed contents of PLUs except the following case:  
Any time outside a sale  
CONDITION  
To change the linked Department of a PLU with sales data not zero: After PLU Reset  
Mode Lock: SET  
OPERATION  
As for details of each Address,  
refer to the following pages.  
(NOTE 2 on the next page.)  
| PLU Code |  
[PLU]  
4 [X]  
| Address Nos | [#]  
(NOTE 1 on the next page.)  
Submode No.  
for sequential-coded item only  
Address 1: Link Department  
1 [ST]  
| Department Code |  
(1 to 99)  
[#]  
Address 2: PLU Name  
2 [ST]  
Character Entries  
[ST]  
max. 16 characters  
Address 3: Preset Price  
| Price | [#]  
3 [ST]  
(max. 6 digits)  
Address 4: Status 1 Codes  
| Status Codes to ON | [#]  
Repeat for  
any  
4 [ST]  
address  
within the  
same PLU  
by re-  
Address 5: Status 2 Codes  
| Status Codes to ON | [#]  
5 [ST]  
entry for  
correction.  
(NOTE 3).  
Address 6: Tax Status  
| Status Codes to ON | [#]  
6 [ST]  
(max. 4 digits)  
Repeat for  
other PLUs.  
Address 8: Whole Package Quantity  
| Whole Package Quantity | [#]  
8 [ST]  
(max. 2 digits)  
Address 9: PLU Group No.  
| PLU Group No. | [#]  
9 [ST]  
(1 to 99; 0 to reset)  
Address 11: Tare Table No.  
| Tare Table No. | [#]  
11 [ST]  
(1 to 9; 0 to reset)  
Address 12: Unit Weight  
| Unit Weight Table Code | [#]  
12 [ST]  
(1 to 11; 0 to reset)  
[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)  
– 43 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
NOTES:  
1) The “Address Nos” designation at the top after “4 [X]” can be skipped if not necessary.  
If entered, the designated Address (es) will automatically be accessed after the PLU  
Code designation.  
2) A maximum of 1300 PLUs are programmable (varies depending on the capacity and  
allocation of the RAM). The “[PLU]” key here indicates the key labeled simply as “PLU”  
but not any PLU Preset-code Keys.  
3) When the Address No. is sequential from the preceding address (if the Address  
Designation feature has not been used), the Address No. and the following [ST] can be  
omitted.  
4) The programming contents of each address are further described in the PLU TABLE  
PROGRAMMING CONTENTS below.  
PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING CONTENTS  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
1
Linked Department Code  
Enter the 2-digit code of the depertment to which the PLU is linked. When  
the PLU is newly programmed, this entry is compulsory (an error will result  
if this entry is skipped.)  
[#]  
1 to 99  
2
3
Linked Department Code  
Enter a maximum of 16 reguler-sized or 8 double-sized characters. See  
the CHARACTER ENTRIES at the beginning of this chapter. End with  
[ST].  
When no name is programmed for a PLU, the following will be the auto-  
program name for printing:  
PLUxxxxxx (PLU Code Max. 6 digits)  
Preset Price  
•
For a preset PLU (preset-price PLU, enter a maximum of 6-digit price,  
and depress [#].  
1 to 999999 (result: $0.01 to $9999.99)  
When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed” is selected,  
the decimal digit can be entered after entering a maximum of 5 interger  
digits and the [ • ] key  
1 to 99999 (result: $0.01 to $999.99)  
or  
0.1 to 99999.9 (result: $0.001 to $999.999)  
A zero-price ($0.00) may be preset by entering 0 in the above operation.  
When no numerics are entered and the [#] key is simply depressed, the  
PLU will be an open PLU (open-price PLU).  
•
•
-- Continued on next page --  
– 44 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
-- Continued --  
4
Status 1 Selection  
•
Enter the Status Codes 2 to 8 whose status must be set to ON side. More  
than one code may be entered. Enter 0 When none of the statuses should  
be set to ON.  
Status  
Code  
Item  
Selective Status  
ON  
OFF  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
-- vacant --  
Net to S.I. 1?  
Net to S.I. 2?  
Food Stamp (or GST) Status?  
Scale Entry  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Prohibited  
Compulsory  
-- vacant --  
Lock or Unlock  
Set Menu  
Unlock (in use) Lock (not in use)  
No Yes  
NOTES:  
•
Net to S.I. 1,2 … Refer to the section of PRESET RATE SETTING FOR  
SELECTIVE ITEMIZERS near the end of this chapter.  
Setting Examples:  
To set only Status 2 to ON … Enter 2 [#]  
To set Statuses 2,3,5 to ON … Enter 235 [#]  
To set none of statuses to ON … Enter 0 [#]  
4
Status 2 Selection  
Enter the Status Code(s) 2 or/and 3 whose status must be set to ON.  
Enter 0 when none of the status should be set to ON.  
•
Status  
Code  
Item  
Selective Status  
OFF  
ON  
1
2
3
-- vacant --  
This PLU is used as  
Modifier PLU Entry  
for this PLU  
Ordinary PLU  
Optional  
Modifier PLU  
Compulsory  
6
Tax Status  
•
Enter one-to four-digit Status Codes for applicable Add-on Tax.  
[#]  
0: Non-taxable  
(More than one code can be  
entered for combining Tax1 to  
Tax4 taxable status. For  
example, enter 12 to select  
Tax1 and Tax2 taxable status.)  
1: Tax 1 (Tax 1 taxable)  
2: Tax 2 (Tax 2 taxable)  
3: Tax 3 (Tax 3 taxable)  
4: Tax 4 (Tax 4 taxable)  
-- Continued on next page --  
– 45 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Address No.  
Description of Programming Contents  
-- Continued --  
8
Whole Package Quantity (for Split Package Pricing PLUs)  
[#]  
Enter the whole package quantity in max. 2 digits (1 to 99), or enter 0 to  
cancel the Split Package Pricing status.  
NOTES: • This setting is not allowed for PLUs with the Scale-compulsory status.  
•
When the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit” is selected, this  
setting is not allowed to any PLUs.  
9
PLU Group No. (for purposes of reports)  
•
Enter a 2-digit code (1 to 99) as a PLU Group No. to which the PLU  
belongs, and depress [#]. To cancel the Group No. once set, enter 0 and  
depress [#].  
11  
Tare Table No. (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)  
[#]  
Enter the Tare Table No. (1 to 9). The content of each Tare Table is set later  
in a separate operation (Submode 26). In a scale item entry of a PLU with a  
Tare Table No. set, the tare weight preset in the Tare Table will automatically  
be subtracted from the total weight read from the scale. Enter 0 to cancel a  
Tare Table No. once set. Or skip this address setting for PLUs not needing  
any tare weight calculations.  
12  
Individual PLU Unit Weight Table Code (for Scale-compulsory PLUs only)  
[#]  
LB unit  
Kg unit  
0:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
General Unit Weight (set in Submode 26)  
1 LB  
2 LB  
3 LB  
4 LB  
5 LB  
6 LB  
7 LB  
8 LB  
9 LB  
1/2 LB  
1/4 LB  
1 Kg  
2 Kg  
3 Kg  
4 Kg  
5 Kg  
6 Kg  
7 Kg  
8 Kg  
9:  
10:  
11:  
9 Kg  
100 Kg  
not applicable  
NOTE: Whether the ECR adopts the LB or Kg unit system is determined by a  
program option selection.  
ADDITIONAL NOTES  
If a PLU is linked to an Other Income Department, the PLU is automatically set as Other Income  
PLU.  
Amount Limits (High Amount, Low Amount) of each open-price PLU will be determined by those of  
its link department.  
– 46 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ex.)  
To program the following PLUs:  
Address  
1
Address Address Address  
Address  
6
Address Address  
Address  
11  
Address  
12  
Address  
2
3
4
5
8
9
PLU  
CODE  
Status1  
ON  
codes  
PLU  
Group  
No.  
Tare  
Table  
No.  
Status 2  
ON  
codes  
Tax  
Status  
Indiv. PLU  
Unit Weight  
Table Code  
Linked  
Dept.  
Code  
Whole  
Package  
Q'ty  
Preset  
Price  
PLU Name  
10101  
10102  
20101  
20102  
20105  
30301  
30302  
30303  
40201  
40202  
40203  
50301  
50302  
50303  
50321  
50322  
60401  
60402  
60403  
60404  
70501  
70502  
80501  
80502  
80503  
90601  
90701  
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
Tomato  
Potato  
Orange  
Lemon  
Apple  
Beef  
1.00  
0.80  
0.75  
1.00  
0.90  
2.50  
2.00  
1.80  
0.75  
0.40  
0.60  
1.30  
0.40  
1.10  
2.50  
open  
1.20  
1.20  
0.90  
0.80  
0.50  
0.45  
4.40  
2.20  
1.20  
0.60  
0.60  
0.50  
1.50  
0.60  
4
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
6
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
7
13  
05  
05  
45  
45  
45  
45  
45  
45  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
24  
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
Pork  
Mutton  
Salmon  
Cod  
1
1
1
Shrimp  
Milk-Large Pack  
Milk-Small Pack  
Nonfat-Milk Pack  
Cheese-Half Pack  
Eggs-6 pack  
White Bread Loaf  
Rye Bread Loaf  
Soft Rolls-6  
Hard Rolls-4  
Tuna Can  
Soup Can  
Strawberry Jam  
Kiwi Jam  
Pickles  
4
2
Coke Small-B  
7-up Small-B  
Small-Btl Depo  
Potato Chips  
Nutmeg  
2
0
2
2
101301 10  
110501 11  
120501 12  
1 to 9  
1 to 99  
0: Non-taxable  
1: Add-on Tax 1  
2: Add-on Tax 2  
3: Add-on Tax 3  
4: Add-on Tax 4  
0: General  
1: 1LB/1Kg  
2: 2LB/2Kg  
:
:
9: 9LB/9Kg  
10: 1/2LB/100g  
11: 1/4LB/not applicable  
0: No ON-statuses  
1: -- vacant --  
2: Net to S.I. 1  
3: Net to S.I. 2  
4: Food Stamp (or GST) Status  
5: -- vacant --  
6: Lock (not in use) status  
7: Set Menu status  
0: No ON-statuses  
1: -- vacant --  
2: Modifier Status  
3: Modifier Compulsory  
-- KEY OPERATION is on the next page --  
– 47 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
KEY OPERATION: for programming some of the PLUs listed on the  
preceding page.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
(Presumed that the following PLUs are newly programmed.)  
Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress [X].  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
10101 [PLU]  
1 [ST]  
2 [ST]  
3 [ST]  
4 [ST]  
5 [ST]  
6 [ST]  
8 [ST]  
9 [ST]  
1 [#] (PLU Code; Linked Dept)  
Tomato [ST] (Name)  
100 [#] (Preset Price / Whole Package)  
4 [#] (ON-status 1 Codes: Food Stampable)  
0 [#] (ON-status 2 Codes: no ON-statuses)  
1 [#] (Tax 1 taxable)  
07-14-1994 MON #1  
P 0 4  
010101  
PLU010101  
#01  
#02  
#03  
#04  
#05  
#06  
#08  
#09  
01  
6 [#] (Whole Package Quantity is 6)  
1 [#] (PLU Group No.)  
Tomato  
1.00@  
4
0
1
6
01  
90601 [PLU] 1 [ST]  
9 [#] (PLU Code; Linked Dept)  
Coke Small-B [ST] (Name)  
60 [#] (Preset Price / one-bottle net)  
2 [#] (ON-status 1 Codes; Net to S.I. 1)  
0 [#] (ON-status 2 Codes: no ON-statuses)  
1 [#] (Tax 1 taxable)  
2 [ST]  
3 [ST]  
4 [ST]  
5 [ST]  
6 [ST]  
9 [ST]  
6 [#] (PLU Group No.)  
090601  
PLU090601  
#01  
09  
#02  
#03  
#04  
#05  
#06  
#09  
Coke Small-B  
101301 [PLU] 1 [ST]  
10 [#] (PLU Code; Linked Dept)  
Small-Btl Depo [ST] (Name)  
5 [#] (Preset Price / bottle)  
0 [#] (ON-status 1 Codes; no ON-statuses)  
0 [#] (ON-status 2 Codes: no ON-statuses)  
1 [#] (Tax 1 taxable)  
0.60@  
2 [ST]  
3 [ST]  
4 [ST]  
5 [ST]  
6 [ST]  
9 [ST]  
2
0
1
06  
13 [#] (PLU Group No.)  
101301  
PLU101301  
#01  
[AT/TL] to end  
10  
#02  
Small-Btl Depo  
#03  
#04  
#05  
0.05@  
0
0
#06  
#09  
1
13  
00030  
0026  
– 48 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Deletion  
To delete a PLU with sales data of zero: Any time outside a sale  
To delete a PLU with sales data of not zero: After PLU Reset  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
Individual PLU Deletion  
[ITEM CORR]  
4 [X]  
| PLU Code | [PLU]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
ex.)  
To delete PLU No. 90701 (7-up Small-B) that was  
once programmed:  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress [X]  
[ITEM CORR] 90701 [PLU]  
[AT/TL]  
11-14-1994 MON #1  
P 0 4  
090701  
7-up Small-B  
------------------------  
00029  
0028  
All PLU Deletion  
[ITEM CORR]  
[AT/TL]  
4 [X]  
[ALL VOID]  
– 49 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU Programmed Data Copying  
This operation is used to copy the programmed data of a PLU item and to use it in programming an-  
other PLU item, thus eliminating time in PLU programming operation.  
To program new PLUs or to change any programmed contents of PLUs:  
Any time outside a sale (except the following case)  
To change the PLU of the copy-destination with sales data not zero:  
After PLU Reset  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
4 [X]  
| PLU Code of the copy-destination | [PLU]  
[NS]  
| PLU Code of the copy-source |  
[PLU]  
The programmed data of the copy-source PLU is now copied  
to the copy-destination PLU (except the PLU Code). Then  
follow the procedure on the page of Programming or  
Changing to change data of any required Addresses.  
ex.) To program PLU 90701 (7-up Small-B) again that was once  
programmed and then deleted, by copying the programmed data  
of PLU 90601 (Coke Small-B):  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Mode Lock: SET, enter 4, depress [X]  
90701 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-destination)  
[NS]  
90601 [PLU] (PLU Code of the copy-source)  
11-14-1994 MON #1  
P 0 4  
090701  
2
#00 090601  
2 [ST]  
7-up Small-B [ST]  
(Address 2, Name changed into: 7-up Small-B)  
9 [ST] 7 [#] (Address 9, PLU Group No. changed into : 7)  
#02  
#09  
7-up Small-B  
0030  
07  
[AT/TL] (to end this submode)  
00030  
– 50 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TIME SETTING OR ADJUSTMENT (Submode 5)  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
OPERATION  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
5 [@/FOR]  
| Hour | | Minute |  
(0 to 23) (00 to 59)  
[AT/TL]  
11-14-1994 MON #1  
P 0 5  
NOTE:  
If an hour value of more than 23 or a minute value of  
more than 59 is entered, it will result in an error. The  
current date will not be changed by setting or adjusting  
the time.  
13:35TM  
0032  
ex.)  
To set the time to "1:35 p.m. (13:35)":  
Mode Lock to SET, enter 5, depress [@/FOR]  
Enter 1335, depress [AT/TL].  
DATE SETTING OR ADJUSTMENT (Submode 6)  
CONDITION  
Any time outside a sale  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
6 [@/FOR]  
| Day-of-Week Code | | Month | | Day | | Year |  
[AT/TL]  
(01 to 12) (01 to 31) (1994, 1995, etc.)  
0: SUN (Sunday)  
1: MON (Monday)  
2: TUE (Tuesday)  
3: WED (Wednesday)  
4: THU (Thursday)  
5: FRI (Friday)  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
6: SAT (Saturday)  
11-14-1994 MON #1  
P 0 6  
ex.)  
To set the date to Monday,  
December 19, 1994:  
1 12-19-1994  
0033  
Mode Lock: SET, enter 6, depress [@/FOR]  
Enter 112191994, depress [AT/TL]  
NOTES:  
1. The date entry order may be Day-Month-Year or Year-Month-Day instead of Month-  
Day-Year if so selected in the program option.  
2. The Day-of-week is programmable not to be printed on receipts.  
– 51 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
AMOUNT LIMIT SETTING FOR FUNCTION KEYS (Submode 8)  
This submode sets the high amount limit in finalizing transactions by tendering through each media key  
and also sets the high and low amount limits in entering amount through departments.  
CONDITION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
OPERATION  
8 [@/FOR]  
| Key Code | [ST]  
| Amount Limit Set Value | [#]  
[AT/TL]  
|
Max. 8 digits; 0 to reset  
(See the table below.)  
Repeat for another key.  
Key  
Code  
Key  
code  
Item or Key to be applied  
Item or Key to be applied  
1
2
3
4
5
[AT/TL] (Cash Tender)  
[CHK TEND] (Check Tender)  
[Chg] (Charge Tender)  
[MISC] (Misc. Tender)  
[CPN] (Media-Coupon Tender)  
7
8
9
10  
11  
[CREDIT 2] (Credit 2 Tender)  
[CREDIT 3] (Credit 3 Tender)  
[CREDIT 4] (Credit 4 Tender)  
[FSTL TEND] (Food Stamp Tender)  
Common High Limit for all depts.  
6
[CREDIT 1] (Credit 1 Tender)  
12  
Common Low limit for all depts.  
NOTES:  
1. If the individual High or Low Amount Limit of a department has been set, it prevails  
over the Common High or Low Limit for all departments here.  
2. The Amount Limit Set Value of each tender media is the high amount limit and is  
effective only when the media key is used for tendering but not when used as total  
key.  
ex.) To set the Amount Limits of the following items:  
Key Code  
Amount Limit  
Set Value  
2 ([CHK TND])  
11 (Common High)  
12 (Common Low)  
$99.99  
$999.99  
$0.01  
9999  
100000  
1
Mode Lock : SET, 8 [@/FOR]  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRI-VE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
2 [ST]  
(Item Code for Check Media Key)  
9999 [#]  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
11 [ST]  
12 [ST]  
[AT/TL]  
100000 [#] (Common High Limit for all depts.)  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
1 [#] (Common Low Limit for all depts.)  
P 0 8  
#02 CHECK  
#11  
99.99  
1000.00  
0.01  
#12  
0037  
– 52 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
CUSTOMER FILE CODE (CHECK TRACK NO.) AND NAME SETTING  
(Submode 15)  
This submode creates files for customers whose sales are to be processed using the check track  
memory.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Repeat for other codes.  
*
Character Entries  
Max. 16 characters for  
the Customer's Name  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
15 [X]  
| Customer File Code | [ST]  
(Max. 12 digits;  
1 to 999999999999)  
* (For sequentially programming Customer  
File Codes, the code specification can be  
skipped.)  
when no name is to be  
programmed for the code  
NOTES:  
1. The Customer File codes that are programmed in this submode will be accessed by  
entering the code and depressing the [PICK UP BAL] key for a sale entry in a charge  
postingoperationintheREGorMGRmode. Atthistime,thebalanceofthenewcustomer  
assigned with the code will show zero which will be printed as the previous balance line.  
On finalizing the sale, the new balance will be printed at the bottom of the receipt, which  
will be stored in the same Customer File Code memory area. Thus the operator always  
use the [PICK UP BAL] key for both starting a new customer’s account and at recalling  
the customer’s balance.  
2. If all the programmed Customer File Codes are used up and a new customer file code is  
required to be opened during the business hours, the [CODE OPEN] key may be used.  
When a new code is entered, followed by [CODE OPEN], the code is printed as the  
previous balance line item with the balance zero on the receipt, and at the same time, the  
code is added to the list of the Customer File Codes programmed in the above operation  
of Submode 15. However, the use of the [CODE OPEN] key can be programmed to  
require Manager Intervention, which can control the operator’s opening of a new  
customer file code outside the list of the Customer File Codes programmed in Submode  
15.  
3. When the Expansion Memory is used, a maximum of 3.000 Customer File Codes can be  
programmed. However, the actual maximum number of the files varies depending on  
RAM Allocation.  
Deletion of Individual Customer File Codes  
Repeat for other codes to be deleted.  
[ITEM CORR]  
or  
I Customer File Code I [ST]  
15 [X]  
[AT/TL]  
[VOID]  
Deletion of All Customer File Codes  
[ITEM CORR]  
15 [X]  
[ALL VOID]  
[AT/TL]  
or  
[VOID]  
NOTE:  
If the balance of the deleted code is not zero, the Transfer memory of the code will  
automatically be adjusted to zero. At that time, the previous balance to be reset will be  
printed.  
– 53 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ex.) To program the following Customer File Codes with Customer Names:  
Mode Lock: SET  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
CODE  
NAME  
Enter 15, depress [X]  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
1
JAMES HAILY  
1 [ST] (Customer File Code)  
JAMES HAILY [ST] (Name)  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 1 5  
#000000000001  
JAMES HAILY  
#000000000105  
HELEN REED  
00015  
105 [ST]  
(Customer File Code)  
HELEN REED [ST] (Name)  
105  
HELEN REED  
0010  
[AT/TL]  
Number of Customer Files opened  
ex.)  
To delete Customer File Code 104 that has once  
been programmed:  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 15, depress [X].  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
[ITEM CORR] 104 [ST] (Customer File Code)  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 1 5  
#000000000104  
JUDY WILSON  
[AT/TL]  
------------------------  
00014  
0014  
Number of Customer Files remain-  
ing opened  
– 54 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
SALESPERSON CODE AND NAME PROGRAMMING (Submode 20)  
By programming Salesperson Codes here, those codes may be used in sales entries. In addition, the  
name of each salesperson can be programmed in maximum 12 characters.  
Programming  
CONDITION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
OPERATION  
20 [X]  
| Salesperson Code | [ST]  
Character Entries  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
.
.
.
1 to 99  
*
See NOTE 1 below.  
Repeat for other salespersons. * For sequentially programming codes, the code  
number specification can be skipped.  
NOTES:  
1. A maximum of 12 regular-sized or 6 double-sized characters may be programmed for  
a name. A combination of both types is also available.  
2. Even if no name is programmed (i.e. skipping the Character Entries before the sec-  
ond [ST] key) for a Salesperson Code, that code can be used in sale entries. Then,  
auto-preset ID symbol “S P xx” (xx = Salesperson Code) will be printed instead of a  
name on a receipt, etc.  
ex.)  
Code  
1
To program the following Salesperson Codes and names:  
Name  
White  
Mode Lock: SET  
20 [X].  
1 [ST] (Salesperson Code 1)  
W
h
i
t
e [ST]  
2
3
Stacy  
2 [ST] (Salesperson Code 2)  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
S
t
a
c
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
y [ST]  
Jansen  
3 [ST] (Salesperson Code 3)  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
J
a
n
s
P 2 0  
01 White  
02 Stacy  
03 Jansen  
e
n [ST]  
0047  
[AT/TL]  
– 55 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Deletion  
CONDITION  
After Daily Salesperson Reset  
Mode Lock: SET  
OPERATION  
20 [X]  
[ITEM CORR]  
| Salesperson Code | [ST]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeat for other salespersons to be deleted.  
NOTE:  
When a Salesperson Code is deleted in the above operation, no entries using that code  
will be accepted until the code is again opened in the “Programming” operation already  
described.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
ex.)  
To delete Salesperson Code 3 (name: Jansen)  
that was once programmed:  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Mode Lock: SET, 20 [X]  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
[ITEM CORR] 3 [ST]  
P 2 0  
03 Jansen  
------------------------  
0048  
[AT/TL]  
– 56 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TARE TABLE AND GENERAL UNIT WEIGHT SETTING (Submode 26)  
In the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation (Submode 4), some of Scale-compulsory PLUs may be  
set with a Tare Table No. The actual tare weight is set to each Tare Table here. Also, the General Unit  
Weight is set here so that the Unit Weight may be effective to scale items entered through departments  
or PLUs without any Individual Unit Weight designation.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
26 [@/FOR]  
| Tare Table No. |  
1 to 9  
[ST]  
| Tare Weight |  
[#]  
0 to 999  
(Unit: 1/100 LB or gram.  
Example: enter 13 for 0.13 LB.)  
*
Repeat for other tables.  
* (For sequentially programming  
tables, the Table No. specification  
can be skipped.)  
Only to set the  
General Unit  
Weight  
**  
| General Unit Weight Code |  
1 to 11  
[AT/TL]  
** Only to set the Tare  
Weight  
LB unit  
1 LB  
kg unit  
1 kg  
1:  
9:  
10:  
11:  
9 LB  
1/2 LB  
1/4 LB  
9 kg  
100 g  
Not applicable  
NOTE:  
The initial value for the General Unit Weight is set to Code 1 (1 LB or 1 Kg).  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
ex.)  
To set the following:  
Tare Table No. 1 with Tare Weight 0.13 LB,  
General Weight 2 LB (Code 2).  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 2 6  
Mode Lock: SET, 26 [@/FOR]  
#1  
0.13LB  
2LB  
1 [ST] 13 [#] 2 [AT/TL]  
0037  
– 57 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU PRESET-CODE KEY SETTING (Submode 27)  
When there are any keys programmed as PLU Preset-code Keys on the ECR Keyboard, and/or when  
the PLU Keyboard PK-2 (hardware option) is connected to the ECR, a PLU code may be preset to each  
of those keys in this operation.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
Repeat for other keys.  
[AT/TL]  
27 [@/FOR]  
[KEY]  
| Keyboard phase No. | [ST]  
| PLU Code |  
1 to 3;  
See NOTE 4 below  
Enter through Numeric  
Keys on the ECR  
Keyboard  
Depress the required key on  
the ECR Keyboard or on the  
PK-2 Keyboard.  
(Enter 0 to close the key);  
Max. 6 digits  
NOTES:  
1. If the PLU Code entry is skipped and a [KEY] is simply depressed in the above  
sequence, the preprogrammed PLU Code of the KEY will be displayed.  
2. A non-opened PLU Code (i.e. PLU non-existent in the PLU table file can be set on a  
KEY, however, pressing the KEY in sale entries will result in an error unless the code  
is opened in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING operation. Submode 4.  
3. If “0” is entered as PLU Code in the above sequence, the KEY will be closed. Press-  
ing the closed KEY in sale entry will cause an error.  
4. The designation of the keyboard phase No. is omissible. In this case, the PLU code  
is automatically programmed on the keyboard phase No. 1.  
This designation is unavailable to the PK-2.  
ex.)  
To set the following PLU Codes to KEYS on the ECR keyboard:  
PLU Code  
Mode Lock to SET.  
27 [@/FOR]  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
50321 [required key]  
50322 [required key]  
50321  
50322  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
[AT/TL]  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 2 7  
Location Code (left side): refer to REMARKS 1 and 2 on  
the next page.  
PLU Code assigned to the key (right side)  
#073  
#074  
050321  
050322  
0017  
– 58 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PK-2 KEYBOARD  
1
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
NOTES:  
1. The Nos 1 through 130 marked on the PK-2 Keyboard are the KEY Nos to be printed  
on the left side of the program receipt issued in the operation on the preceding page.  
If each KEY is not set with a PLU Code, the auto-preset PLU Code identical to the  
initial KEY No. in the above figure will be active as its preset PLU Code.  
ex.)  
KEY No. 1 .................... PLU Code 1  
KEY No. 130 ................ PLU Code 130  
2. When a PLU code is assigned to a PLU Preset-code Key on the ECR Keyboard in the  
operation on the preceding page, the Hardware Key Code which indicates the abso-  
lute location of the key will be printed to the left of the assigned PLU Code.  
The Hardware Key Codes of the ECR keyboard are shown below.  
ECR Flat Type Keyboard  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 22 29 36 43 50 57 64 71 78 85 92 99 104 110 117 124 129 136 139  
16 23 30 37 44 51 58 65 72 79 86 93  
105 111 118 125 130 137 140  
100  
112  
10 17 24 31 38 45 52 59 66 73 80 87 94  
119 126 131 138 141  
11 18 25 32 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 101 106 113 120  
12 19 26 33 40 47 54 61 68 75 82 89 96 102 107 114 121  
132  
133  
134  
135  
142  
143  
144  
145  
127  
128  
13 20 27 34 41 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 97  
14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 77 84 91 98  
108 115 122  
109 116 123  
103  
– 59 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DISPLAY MESSAGE PROGRAMMING (Submode 31)  
The “DISPLAY MESSAGE” here means the message to be displayed in the 16-digit dot windows of the  
Operator Display panel (and Customer Display panel if the 16-digit dot windows are installed as hard-  
ware option) while the Mode Lock of the terminal is in the “LOCK” position. This display message may  
be used as information, commercial message, welcoming greeting, etc.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
31 [X]  
Character Entries [ST]  
[AT/TL]  
| Message Line No. | [ST]  
(1 to 4;  
max. 4 lines)  
(Max. 16 characters per line.  
Regular-size only.)  
*
Repeat for other lines.  
*
Allowed for sequential Line No. only.  
NOTES:  
1. When the option “Store Message SCROLLING DISPLAY” is selected, four lines (Line  
Nos 1 to 4) are available. Even when the option “Store Message 16 CHARACTERS  
HELD” is selected, four lines (Line Nos  
1
to 4) are available.  
In this case, refer to “Store Message Display” operation to display the respective  
message lines.  
2. When the “SCROLLING DISPLAY” option is selected, a maximum of 64 characters can  
beenteredconsecutivelyafterdesignatingLineNo.1atfirstanddepressing[ST]foreach  
line end.  
3. The character must be regular-sized only.  
4. The DISPLAY MESSAGE set here will also appear in the REG or MGR mode if so  
designated by program option.  
– 60 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ex.)  
To program the following display message under the "SCROLLING DISPLAY" option:  
C O U N T E R  
T H I S  
I S  
Line No. 1  
Line No. 2  
C L O S E D  
P L E A S E  
.
G O  
H A N K  
T O  
A N O T H E R ,  
Y O U . . .  
T
Line No. 3  
Line No. 4  
OPERATION: Mode Lock; SET, enter 31, depress [X].  
1 [ST] (Line No. 1)  
(3 [ST]) (Line No. 3)  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
T
H
I
S
G
O
[SPACE]  
T
O
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
[SPACE]  
C
[SPACE]  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
O
U
N
T
E
R
A
N
O
T
H
E
P 3 1  
1
THIS COUNTER IS  
2
CLOSED.  
3
PLEASE  
GO TO ANOTHER, T  
4
HANK YOU...  
0062  
[SPACE]  
I
S
R
,
[SPACE]  
T
[SPACE]  
[ST]  
[ST]  
(2 [ST]) (Line No. 2)  
(4 [ST]) (Line No. 4)  
C
H
L
A
O
N
S
K
E
[SPACE]  
D
.
Y
O
U
.
[SPACE]  
[SPACE]  
P
.
L
.
E
[ST]  
A
S
E
[AT/TL]  
[SPACE]  
[ST]  
– 61 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
NEGATIVE AMOUNT KEY LIMIT AMOUNT SETTING (Submode 35)  
This submode sets the limit amount to be entered through each of the negative-amount keys [VND CPN],  
[STR CPN], [BTL RTN], and [DOLL DISC].  
Any time outside a sale  
CONDITION  
Mode Lock: SET  
OPERATION  
[AT/TL]  
35 [@/FOR]  
|Key Code| [ST]  
| Limit Amount | [#]  
1 to 4  
(See the table below.)  
Max. 6 digits  
(1 to 999999; result: $0.01to $9999.99)  
Enter 0 to reset the limit.  
* (Repeatable from  
here for sequentially  
programming Key  
Codes.)  
*
Repeat for other Key Codes.  
KEY CODE AND KEY TABLE  
Key Code  
Key  
1
2
3
4
[VND CPN]  
[STR CPN]  
[BTL RTN]  
[DOLL DISC]  
NOTES:  
1. The respective keys will not be restricted by the limit amount set here but the amount  
up to 7 digits will be entered in MGR or mode.  
2. The limit set here cannot be released by the [LC OPEN] (or [OPEN]) key in transac-  
tion entries.  
ex.)  
Key  
To set High Limit Amounts for the respective keys below:  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Key Code  
High Limit  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Mode Lock: SET  
35 [@/FOR]  
[VND CPN]  
[STR CPN]  
[BTL RTN]  
1
2
3
$10.00  
$20.00  
$1.20  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
1 [ST] 1000 [#]  
(2 [ST])2000 [#]  
(3 [ST])120 [#]  
(4 [ST])100 [#]  
P 3 5  
[DOLL DISC]  
4
$1.00  
V. CPN  
S. CPN  
BTR  
$10.00  
$20.00  
$1.20  
DISC  
$1.00  
[AT/TL]  
0066  
– 62 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
SET MENU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 42)  
This submode creates the set menu tables for PLUs with set menu status programmed in PLU TABLE  
PROGRAMMING (Submode No. 4). By entering the PLU programmed as a set menu PLU (main menu)  
in this programming, the sub-menu items are entered automatically.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
42 [@/FOR]  
| Set Menu Table No. | [ST]  
| PLU Code | [PLU]  
[#]  
[AT/TL]  
1 to 30  
Enter the PLU Code of main  
menu, then enter the PLU  
Codes of sub menus.  
Repeat for other item to be  
contained.  
(Max. 8 items including the Main  
Menu.)  
Repeat for other Set Menu Tables (max. 30 tables)  
NOTE:  
The main menu is also available with an open PLU.  
To set the following Set Menu:  
ex.)  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Table No.1  
Main Menu PLU No. 5 (BEEF STK SET)  
Sub Menu PLU No.30 (VEGET. SALAD)  
Sub Menu PLU No.40 (CORN SOUP)  
Sub Menu PLU No.50 (COFFEE)  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 4 2  
000005  
Mode Lock to SET, 42 [@/FOR] 1 [ST] 5 [PLU] 30 [PLU]  
40 [PLU] 50 [PLU] [#] [AT/TL]  
#01  
000030  
000040  
000050  
0103  
– 63 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
DEPARTMENT PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING  
A price of each department may be set or changed by this operation.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Repeatable for other departments.  
| New Preset Price | [DEPT]  
[AT/TL]  
.
.
NOTE2  
.
NOTE 1: With the option “Preset Point for one  
.
decimal digit allowed”, 0 to 99999,9  
(result: $0.000 to $999.999), using the [ . ]  
key.  
Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999  
(result; $0.00 to $9999.99)  
NOTE 1  
NOTE 2: The “[DEPT]” here indicates a Depart-  
ment Preset-code Key. When the [DP#]  
key is used, see the operation below.  
Using the [DP#] Key:  
[DP#]  
| Dept Code |  
| New Preset Price | [#]  
[AT/TL]  
Repeatable from here when the  
Dept Code is sequential.  
Repeatable for other departments.  
To change a preset-price department into an open department, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and  
simply depress the [DEPT] key (in the first operation pattern) or simply depress the [#] key (in the  
second operation pattern). Presetting a zero-price is also possible.  
ex.) To set the following preset prices of departments:  
Dept. 13 ....... $1.40  
Dept. 14 ....... $2.10  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
By the first operation pattern:  
P 0 0  
13 D P 13  
1.40@  
14 D P 14  
2.10@  
140 [DEPT 13]  
210 [DEPT 14]  
By the second operation pattern:  
0083  
13 [DP#] 140 [#]  
(14 [DP#]) 210 [#]  
[AT/TL]  
– 64 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING, WHOLE PACKAGE  
QUANTITY CHANGING  
The preset price of each PLU may be set in the PLU TABLE PROGRAMMING (Submode 4) already  
described. However, in setting or changing the price only but not other programmed data, the following  
operation will be more convenient.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
| PLU Code | [PLU]  
.
.
.
.
| New Preset Price | [#]  
[AT/TL]  
Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999  
(result; $0.00 to $9999.99)  
(See NOTE below.)  
Max. 6 digits  
*
Repeatable for other PLUs  
* Repeatable from here if the PLU Code is sequential.  
NOTE:  
With the option “Preset Point for one decimal digit allowed”, 0 to 99999.9 (result: $0.000  
to $999.999) using the [ . ] key.  
To change a preset-price PLU into an open-price PLU, skip the “New Preset Price” entry and simply  
depress the [#] key. Presetting a zero-price is also possible.  
ex.)  
To set the following preset price of PLUs:  
Old Price  
New Price  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
PLU 110501 (Potato Chips)  
PLU 120501 (Nutmeg)  
$1.50  
$0.60  
$1.55  
$0.65  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
OPERATION  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
Mode Lock: SET  
P 0 0  
110501  
Potato Chips  
120501  
110501 [PLU] 155 [#]  
120501 [PLU] 65 [#]  
1.55@  
0.65@  
Nutmeg  
[AT/TL]  
0086  
– 65 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Setting or Changing Preset Price of Split Package Pricing PLU  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
New Whole  
Package  
Quantity  
| PLU Code | [PLU]  
[ST]  
| New Preset Price | [#]  
[AT/TL]  
.
.
.
.
Max. 6 digits  
*
Repeatable for other PLUs  
* Repeatable from here if the PLU Code is sequential.  
ex.)  
To set the following preset price of PLUs:  
New Whole  
New Preset  
Package Q'ty  
Price  
PLU 20105 (Apple)  
OPERATION  
6
$1.25  
Mode Lock: SET  
20105 [PLU] 6 [ST] 125 [#]  
[AT/TL]  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
020105  
Apple  
/ 6  
1.25@  
0088  
– 66 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
%+ AND %- PRESET RATE SETTING  
A preset rate may be set on each of the [%+] and [%-] keys, one independent rate for each key. Once  
a rate is preset, the % key will simply be depressed without a prior rate entry to activate the preset rate.  
If a rate is entered prior to the depression of the key, the entered rate (manual rate) will be activated  
instead.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
| Preset Rate | [% +] (For Percent Charge Preset Rate)  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
(0.001 to 99.999 (%); use the [ . ] key if a decimal  
portion is contained.))  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
13
%+  
10%  
| Preset Rate | [% –] (For Percent Discount Preset Rate)  
P
0037  
Ope
Closed : every Wednesday  
ex.) To set 10% on [%+] key:  
Mode Lock: SET, enter 10, depress [%+]  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
ex.) To set 5% on [%-] Key;  
%-  
5%  
0038  
Mode Lock: SET, enter 5, depress [%-].  
To reset the rate once set:  
Enter 0, depress the required % key.  
(Then the % key will always require a manual rate entry in sale entries.)  
NOTE:  
When two [%+] keys or two [%-] keys are installed on the keyboard, two different % rates  
(one for each) may be preset, in the same manner as described above. The two rates may  
be the same or different from the other. Or only one key may be preset with a rate and other  
may remain non-preset.  
– 67 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PRESET RATE SETTING FOR SELECTIVE ITEMIZERS (SI1 and SI2)  
If any of [ST1/TL] (or [SI/TL]) and [SI2/TL] keys are installed on the keyboard, a preset rate may be  
programmed on each key.  
As for the functions and applications of the Selective Itemizers, refer to the description on the next  
page.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
[SI1/TL]  
(or [SI/TL])  
| Preset Rate of SI 1 |  
(0.001 to 99.999(%); use the [ . ] key if a decimal portion is contained.)  
| Preset Rate of SI 2 |  
[SI2/TL]  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
NOTES:  
1. Whether the calculated amount by the preset SI %-  
rate affects (i.e. add to or subtract from) the sale total  
is determined by a system option status selection.  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
2. To reset the rate once set, enter 0 as the rate. Then  
the rate is regarded as 100% if the option “Non-  
affect” is selected. With the option “SI Affects Sale  
Total”, some rate other than “0” should be pro-  
grammed.)  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
SI 1TL  
7%  
0043  
ex.) To set 7% as SI1 preset % rate:  
Mode Lock: SET  
7 [ST1/TL].  
– 68 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Selective Itemizer Functions and Applications  
The “Selective Itemizer” is a temporary total memory for each sale and is activated separately from the Main  
Itemizer (i.e. sale total memory). If certain Department or PLU items are programmed with the SI (selective  
itemizer) “net” status, the Selective Itemizer will function to add up amounts of the SI-net status items in  
registering the items, while the Main Itemizer will function to add up all the items in the sale. Thus, near the  
sale finalization, the operator may read the SI content by depressing the [SI/TL] key.  
A preset % rate may be programmed for each of SI1 and SI2 (on the preceding page), and whether the  
calculated amount will add to, subtract from, or non-affect the sale total is a selective option. Whether the  
amount resulted by depressing the [Sl/TL] key will print or non-print is another selective option.  
Theapplicationsofthisfunctionmayvaryfromstoretostore. Somestoresmayuseitforcountingtheservice  
stampstobeissuedtothecustomersaccordingtothesaleamountofservice-stampableitems. Inthiscase,  
the option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total” should be selected, and a preset % rate, 1% for example, may  
be set to issue one service stamp for every $1.00. Thus the number of stamps to be issued to the customer  
is displayed (and printed if so programmed) as a result of calculation with the preset % rate, but the resulted  
value (the number of stamps in this case) will not affect the sale total.  
Example 1)  
With option “SI Total Non-affects Sale Total”:  
Receipt/Journal Print  
Key Operation in REG Mode  
100 [DEPT 1] (SI-net)  
150 [DEPT 2] (non-SI)  
200 [DEPT 3] (SI-net)  
[SI/TL] (1% is preset)  
[AT/TL]  
"S": SI-net Symbol  
D P 01  
D P 02  
D P 03  
SI TL  
CASH  
1.00 S  
1.50  
2.00 S  
0.03  
Number of stamps to  
be issued.  
4 . 5 0  
Dept.1 and Dept. 3 are programmed with SI-net-status. On depressing [SI/TL], “0.03” (which is 1  
% of total amount of Dept. 1 “1.00” + Dept. 3 “2.00”) is displayed and printed, and 3 stamps are to  
be issued to the customer in this case.  
The sale total “4.50” is not affected by the SI calculation.  
Other stores may use it for calculating the discount amount for certain sales items during a special discount  
sales period by presetting the discount % rate on the SI and programming SI-net status to certain  
Departments and PLUs which are subject to the special discount.  
Example 2)  
With option “SI Special Discount”:  
Receipt/Journal Print  
Key Operation in REG Mode  
100 [DEPT 1] (SI-net)  
150 [DEPT 2] (non-SI)  
200 [DEPT 3] (SI-net)  
[SI/TL] (10% is preset)  
[AT/TL]  
D P 01  
D P 02  
D P 03  
SI TL  
CASH  
1.00 S  
1.50  
2.00 S  
-0.30  
4 . 2 0  
Discount Amount  
resulted by SI %  
On depressing [SI/TL], “-0.30” (which is 10% discount from the total amount of Dept.1 + Dept. 3 items)  
is displayed and printed, and that amount is subtracted from the sale total. (4.50 - 0.30 = 4.20)  
– 69 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE SETTING  
In this program, the rate of each foreign currencies (corresponding to the [CUR1] to [CUR5] keys) will  
be set. By setting a rate on each Foreign Currency Key, reading the sale total and tendering in the  
foreign currency value will be possible for sale finalization.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
[CUR1]  
| Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 1 |  
0.000001 to 9999.999999  
(Use the [ . ] key if decimal portion is contained in the rate.)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
| Exchange Rate for Foreign Currency 5 |  
[CUR5]  
As for how to calculate the Exchange Rate, see the description below.  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Calculation  
1. The rate must be calculated in the subsidiary currency unit values for both the domestic and the  
foreign currencies. (In calculating the rate from the domestic to a foreign currency with the same  
zero-suppress form, such as from U.S. $ to French Franc. it will be no problem even if it is calculated  
in the main currency of $ and Franc. However, in case of exchanging from a domestic currency  
such as $ or Franc to Japanese yen or Italian Lira, or vice versa, this rule must be obeyed; otherwise  
a wrong rate will result.)  
2. Calculate the required foreign currency value equivalent to the domestic currency value “1”. Then  
the obtained value is the Exchange Rate value to be entered in the setting operation stated above.  
For example, if the domestic currency is U.S. $:  
1¢  
=
=
=
xxxx.xxxxxx centimes (French Franc)  
xxxx.xxxxxx pfennings (Deutsche Mark)  
xxxx.xxxxxx yen (Japaneses yen)  
etc.  
Enter this value as each foreign currency rate.  
– 70 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ex.) To set three foreign currency rates:  
Domestic Currency ....... U.S. $  
Assigning: [CUR 1] ..... French Franc  
[CUR 2] ..... Deutsche Mark  
[CUR 3] ..... Japanese yen  
Conditions given for Domestic Currency and Foreign Currencies  
(The rates here are merely examples.)  
(DOMESTIC)  
U.S. Dollar  
(CUR1)  
(CUR2)  
(CUR3)  
French  
Franc  
Deutsche  
Mark  
Japanese  
Yen  
$1.00  
1 cent  
=
=
F5.3729  
=
=
DM1.7619  
=
=
(145.50)  
... In Main Cur-  
rency Values  
... In Subsidiary  
5.3729  
centimes  
1.7619  
pfennigs  
1.4550  
yen  
Currency Values  
(Enter these values  
for setting.)  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
KEY OPERATION for setting the rates above:  
Mode Lock: SET  
5 [ . ] 3729 [CUR1] (for French Franc)  
1 [ . ] 7619 [CUR2] (for Deutsche Mark)  
1 [ . ] 4550 [CUR3] (for Japanese yen)  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
CUR1  
5.3729  
*
0046  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Resetting a Foreign Currency Rate Once Set:  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
Enter "0" in place of the Exchange Rate for the Foreign  
Currency in the setting operation. Then the rate for that  
foreign currency will be reset. The Foreign Currency Key of  
the rate thus reset cannot be used in sales entries.  
P 0 0  
CUR2  
1.7619  
*
0047  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
CUR3  
1.455  
*
0048  
– 71 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TAX TABLE PROGRAMMING  
A maximum of four tables can be programmed (Tax 1, Tax 2, Tax 3, Tax 4) in accodance with installa-  
tion of [TX1/M], [TX2/M], [TX3/M], [TX4/M] keys.  
After Financial Daily Reset  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
TYPE 1: TAX 1 FULL BREAKS (COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC AND CYCLIC BREAKS)  
| Max. amount non-taxable | [TX1/M]  
| Max. amount for 1¢ tax levied | [TX1/M]  
| Max. amount for 2¢ tax levied | [TX1/M]  
Repeat up to the “A” Break  
| Max. amount for N¢ tax levied | ... “A” Break (Non-cyclic Break Limit)  
[ST] (to indicate the completion of Non-cyclic Breaks)  
| Max. amount for N + 1¢ tax levied | [TX1/M] (beginning of Cyclic Breaks)  
| Max. amount for N + 2¢ tax levied | [TX1/M]  
Repeat up to the “B” Break (“B” Break - “A” Break = Multiple of $1.00; max. $9.00)  
[AT/TL] (to complete this tax table programming)  
NOTE:  
The break amount entry must be a maximum of 4 digits (1 to 9999 resulting in $0.01  
to $99.99)  
TYPE2: TAX 1 COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC BREAKS AND % RATE  
First set the breaks up to the “A” Break entry and the [ST] key depression as shown in TYPE 1.  
| TAX RATE applied when exceeding the “A” Break amount |  
(0.0001 to 99.9999 (%); use the [ . ] key if a decimal portion is contained. Examples:  
To  
set 5% , enter 5. To set 5.26%, enter 5.26. The fraction of the amount resulting from this %  
rate calculation will be rounded off.)  
[AT/TL] (to complete this tax table programming)  
TYPE3: TAX 1% RATE ONLY  
0 [TM1/M]  
[ST]  
| TAX RATE |  
[AT/TL]  
(The description for the TAX RATE in  
TYPE 2 is also applied to this case.)  
– 72 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
NOTES:  
1. For Tax 2, Tax 3, Tax 4 table programming, follow the same procedure in TYPE1,2, or  
3 on the preceding page, using [TX2/M] or [TX3/M] or [TX4/M] instead of [TX1/M].  
2. If multiple tax tables are programmed, the Tax 1 table must be set first, then Tax 2, Tax  
3 and Tax 4. The Tax 1 table setting will automatically reset all of the old Tax 1,2,3 and  
4 tables if they have been programmed.  
3. No second depression of the [ST] key is allowed within one tax table programming.  
4. A maximum of 99 breaks can be entered for Tax 1 to Tax 4 tables altogether.  
ex. 1)  
TAX 1 FULL BREAKS  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
Tax Table  
Key Operation  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Amount Renge  
Tax Levied  
Mode Lock: SET  
$0.00 to $ 0.10  
$0.11 to $ 0.22  
$0.23 to $0.39  
$0.40 to $0.56  
$0.57 to $0.73  
$0.74 to $0.90  
$0.91 to $1.08  
0¢  
1¢  
2¢  
3¢  
4¢  
5¢  
6¢  
10  
22  
39  
56  
73  
[TX1/M]  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[ST]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[TX1/M]  
[AT/TL]  
P 0 0  
TAX1  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
*
$0.10  
$0.22  
$0.39  
$0.56  
$0.73  
$0.90  
$1.08  
90  
108  
..... “A” Break  
$1.09 to $1.24  
$1.25 to $1.41  
$1.42 to $1.58  
$1.59 to $1.74  
$1.75 to $1.92  
$1.92 to $2.08  
7¢  
8¢  
9¢  
10¢  
11¢  
12¢  
124  
141  
158  
174  
192  
208  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
02  
**  
$1.24  
$1.41  
$1.58  
$1.74  
$1.92  
$2.08  
..... “B” Break  
0058  
– 73 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
ex. 2)  
TAX 2 COMBINATION OF NON-CYCLIC BREAKS AND % RATE  
Tax Table  
Key Operation  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Amount Renge  
Tax Levied  
Mode Lock: SET  
$0.00 to $ 0.09  
$0.10 to $ 0.29  
$0.30 to $0.59  
$0.60 to $0.84  
$0.85 to $1.12  
0¢  
1¢  
2¢  
3¢  
4¢  
9
29  
59  
84  
112  
[TX2/M]  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
[TX2/M]  
[TX2/M]  
[TX2/M]  
[TX2/M]  
[ST]  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
.... “A” Break  
TAX2  
5
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
*
$0.09  
$0.29  
$0.59  
$0.84  
$1.12  
5% is applied to any amount  
exceeding the “A” Break.  
[AT/TL]  
5%  
0064  
ex. 3)  
TAX 3% RATE ONLY  
Tax Table  
Key Operation  
Mode Lock: SET  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
10% is applied to any sale  
amount.  
0
[TX3/M]  
[ST]  
10  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
[AT/TL]  
P 0 0  
TAX3  
00  
*
$0.00  
10%  
0065  
– 74 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
GST RATE SETTING  
This operation sets the rate of GST (Goods and Service Tax) in CANADA.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
| GST Rate |  
[GST/M]  
.
.
.
.
0.01 to 99.99 (%)  
(Use the [ . ] key if the decimal portion is contained.)  
To reset the rate once set:  
Mode Lock: SET  
Enter 0, depress the [GST/M]  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
ex.)To set the GST rate to 12%:  
OPERATION  
P 0 0  
GST  
12%  
Mode Lock: SET  
0069  
12 [GST/M]  
– 75 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
STORE/REGISTER NO. SETTING  
A maximum of 6 digits may be set as ID No. for the store and/or register. And once set, it will be printed  
on every receipt and every transaction on journal.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
| Store/Register No. |  
[#]  
.
.
.
.
Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999  
NOTE  
The preceding zeros, if entered, will not be printed. For example, if “001234” is entered in  
the above operation. “#1234” will always be printed as the Register No.  
ex.)  
To set the following:  
Register No. of this terminal: 3001  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET  
3001 [#]  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
#3001  
0071  
– 76 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
7. VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA  
The programmed data entered in the preceding chapter can be read for verification purposes.  
The print format of each program reading is almost the same as on the program receipt, except that  
“PX” and a 3-digit number are printed instead of printing “P” and a 2-digit number.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: X or SET.  
1. To read out the data of programming operations with a Submode No., first enter “1”, then each  
Submode No., and finally depress the [AT/TL] key.  
For example, to read the programmed data entered in Submode 1 (STORE NAME/MESSAGE,  
COMMERCIAL MESSAGE PROGRAMMING), operate:  
1 0 1  
[AT/TL]  
Submode No. (In case of a 1-digit number, add a “0” on top to be a 2-digit number.)  
Always attach “1” to the Program Submode No. for reading data.  
NOTE: Data of Submodes 5 and 6 cannot be read.  
2. To read out the data of programming operations without a Submode No., the following operation will  
read all the data together:  
1 0 0  
[AT/TL]  
To read the data of the following operations:  
• %+ and %- PRESET RATE  
• SELECTIVE ITEMIZER RATE  
• FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE  
• TAX TABLE (For tax calculation test, refer to the next page.)  
• GST RATE  
3. Zone destination is possible in reading the PLU TABLE:  
[@/FOR]  
1 0 4  
[ST]  
Zone-start  
PLU Code  
Zone-end  
PLU Code  
[AT/TL]  
NOTES:  
1. On depressing the [AT/TL] key, the programmed data will be printed. To abort  
printing once started, depress the [ITEM CORR] or [VOID] key. The reading opera-  
tion is immediately stopped halfway.  
2. To verify the PLU preset-code keys programmed on ECR Keyboard phase Nos. 2  
and 3:  
127 [ST] 2 or 3 [AT/TL]  
– 77 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Tax Calculation Test  
Any time outside a sale  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: X or SET  
Enter any amount.  
Depress [TXBL TL]  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Displays the entered amount.  
Displays the tax amount (Tax 1 + Tax 2 +  
Tax 3 + Tax 4) is displayed, issuing a  
receipt such as below.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P X  
Entered Amount  
$100.00  
Tax 1 amount calculated  
Tax 2 amount calculated  
Tax 3 amount calculated  
Tax 4 amount calculated  
TAX1  
TAX2  
TAX3  
TAX4  
$6.00  
$5.00  
$4.00  
$3.00  
0076  
NOTE: The print or non-print status of each calculated tax amount can be programmed.  
– 78 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M/S LEVEL  
OPERATOR’S GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
1. INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................... 1  
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................ 2  
3. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 3  
3.1 COMMUNICATION SEQUENCE ........................................................................................ 3  
3.2 HARDWARE COMPOSITION ............................................................................................. 3  
3.3 OPERATOR DISPLAY INDICATIONS OF MASTER-SATELLITE SYSTEM ...................... 3  
4. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND REGISTERING PROCEDURE .......................................... 5  
RTR (Register-to-Register) DECLARATION Key ......................................................................... 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
1. INTRODUCTION  
Making the most of the functions described in Standalone Section, the FS-1650 can be developed into  
a master-satellite system.  
By adding the IFU Board for Master-Satellite, a Batch-consolidation system of a maximum of 6 termi-  
nals can be built.  
Operational functions on each terminal ECR basically stay the same as on a standalone ECR, except  
those deleted, changed, or added for this M/S system use which are described later.  
– 1 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION  
PC  
RS-232C  
Master  
Terminal  
Backup Master  
Terminal  
Remote Slip Printer  
Scanner  
Scale  
Remote Slip Printer  
Scanner  
Scale  
RS-485  
Satellite  
Terminal  
Satellite  
Terminal  
Satellite  
Terminal  
Remote Slip Printer  
Scanner  
Scale  
Remote Slip Printer  
Scanner  
Scale  
Remote Slip Printer  
Scanner  
Scale  
Batch-consolidation/Scanning System: Max. 16 terminals  
Master Terminal ... 1 unit  
Backup Master Terminal ... 1 unit  
Satellite Terminal  
... Max 14 units  
or  
Master Terminal  
Satellite Terminal  
... 1 unit  
... Max 14 units  
Remoto Slip Printer: DRS-207  
Scanner:  
Scale:  
OCIA Interface Type  
Serial or Parallel Scale  
– 2 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
3. HARDWARE DESCRIPTION  
3.1. COMMUNICATION SEQUENCE  
RS-485 Line  
3.2. HARDWARE COMPOSITION  
A Master-Satellite System is realized by adding the IFU boards to each standalone ECR.  
3.3. OPERATOR DISPLAY INDICATIONS OF MASTER-SATELLITE  
SYSTEM  
■ Display Indications during In-Line Services  
The followings are displayed in the 16-digit dot windows, 10-digit 7-segment window and IN-LINE  
Lamp of the Operator Display panel during in-line services.  
Blink  
<Master Terminal>  
1
P 5 0  
SLIP  
In-line Job No.  
Illuminated  
IN-LINE  
Mode Indication  
TL  
S
IG  
N
ON  
ST  
CG  
ALM  
R OFF  
ECR No. now serviced at the time of collecting read/  
reset data.  
Number of ECRs unserviced  
• IN-LINE Lamp  
1) Illuminated during RTR declaration “ON”  
2) Extinguished during RTR declaration “OFF”  
3) Blinking during ULL operations  
• Mode Indication  
4
P
X
Z
2
3
1
5
RTR/SET Mode :  
RTR/X Mode :  
RTR/Z Mode :  
– 3 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
<Satellite Terminals or Backup Master Terminal>  
• IN-LINE Lamp  
1) Illuminated during “HOLD” condition  
2) Extinguished after completing in-line services  
3) Blinking during in-line services  
■ Error Messages  
The following table shows the Error Messages to be displayed on in-line terminals, in additions to  
those displayed on Standalone ECRs.  
IN-LINE ERROR MESSAGE TABLE  
(to be added to the table for the Standalone Level)  
Error Message  
Cause of Error  
(Sandard Setting)  
FILE BUSY  
A designated file is already occupied by other terminal.  
IRC CONNECT ERR Ternsmission cannot be executed due to the connection error (Disconnection  
of the line, or Master Terminal’s power is OFF, etc.)  
IRC ERROR  
RKP Transmission Error (Data cannot be transmitted from the Satellite  
Terminal to the Master Terminal.)  
MASTER IS BUSY  
PLEASE BACK UP  
RKP BUFFER FULL  
An inquiry file is being used.  
RTR Declaration can not be canceled due to the Backup Error.  
RKP pool buffer of the Master Terminal or the Backup Master Terminal is full.  
– 4 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
4. ADDITIONAL FUNCTION KEY AND  
REGISTERING PROCEDURE  
The following is the key that can be installed on the Master Terminal of an in-line system, in addition to  
the standalone specifications, and the registering procedure using the key.  
RTR (Register-to-Register) DECLARATION Key ([RTR])  
RTR  
■ By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal, various in-line jobs  
(DLLs, Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings, etc.) can be performed.  
PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION  
Mode Lock: SET, X, Z, or MGR/Anytime outside a sale  
Depress [RTR]  
NOTES: 1. While a PC job is under way ( a command of ULL, DLL, or Read/Reset from the  
PC), this RTR Declaration is not possible. Similarly, while this RTR Declaration is  
on, no PC jobs are possible.  
2. While the RTR Declaration is on, no transaction entries in REG, MGR, or  
mode are possible.  
3. While the RTR Declaration is on, no Backup Data Check is performed.  
4. While the RTR Declaration is on, the following are jobs to be allowed:  
•
•
•
•
Programming Operations  
DLL Operations (DLL to Satellite Terminals)  
Consolidated Read/Reset Report takings  
Manual Copying of Backup Data  
5. The [RTR] key can be programmed to require Manager Intervention.  
6. If the option “Auto Data Copying feature” is selected for Copying of Backup Data,  
the RTR Declaration is not possible while a backup data update process is under  
way.  
■ By depressing the [RTR] key on the Master Terminal when the RTR  
Declaration is on, the RTR Declaration ON status is canceled.  
PROCEDURE ON A MASTER TERMINAL FOR RTR DECLARATION CANCEL  
Mode Lock: SET, X, Z, or MGR/RTR Declaration is ON  
Depress [RTR]  
NOTE:  
If the Backup Error Flag is ON (the standard error message is “PLEASE BACK UP”),  
it means that manual copying of Backup Data is required, and therefore the RTR  
Declaration Cancel is not accepted until copying is completed.  
– 5 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M/S LEVEL  
MANAGER’S GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW .......................................................................................................... 1  
2. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE ................................................................................ 3  
3. READ AND RESET REPORTS .................................................................................................... 6  
4. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS ................................................................................................. 15  
5. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS .................................................................................... 20  
6. DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE ................................................................................. 22  
7. INQUIRIES.................................................................................................................................... 26  
8. BACKUP FUNCTION.................................................................................................................... 28  
9. MASTER AND BACK UP MASTER ALTERNATION  
(if Master Terminal becomes down).............................................................................................. 32  
10. RKP DATA PRINT FROM RECEIPT/JOURNAL .......................................................................... 32  
11. TRANSMISSION ERROR............................................................................................................. 32  
12. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE SERVICE ......................................................... 34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
1. DAILY OPERATION FLOW  
In a Master-Satellite System, a certain order of jobs on the Master and Satellite terminals are pro-  
vided. If the necessary jobs are not proceeded in the correct order, sale entries may not be oper-  
ated or report collections may not be possible. The following chart shows the basic daily operation  
flow on the Master and Satellite terminals.  
MASTER TERMINAL  
SATELLITE TERMINALS  
Turn ON the power of every ECR in the in-line system.  
First turn ON the power of the Master terminal, and then the power of each  
Satellite terminals.  
Operate TERMINAL OPEN CHECK  
to check all the terminals are correctly  
connected (Chapter 2):  
Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration:ON  
80 [AT/TL]  
Operate DATE AND TIME DLL to synchro-  
nize the date and time of Satellite terminals  
to that of the Master terminal (Chapter 5).  
Mode Lock: SET /RTR Declaration:ON  
505 [AT/TL]  
STORE OPEN  
Sign ON, Sale Entries, Sign OFF  
Refer to the OPERATOR’S GUIDE for the Standalone level.  
Read (X) Report Takings on Individual Terminals  
Refer to Section 3.2 in this manual and MANAGER’S GUIDE for the Standalone  
level.  
In-line Read Report Takings on  
Master Terminal.  
Refer to Section 3.2. in this manual.  
(to be continued on the next page.)  
– 1 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
(Continued from the Preceding page)  
(MASTER TERMINAL)  
(SATELLITE TERMINALS)  
STORE CLOSE  
Sign OFF on all the terminals (including the Master Terminal) when all the sale  
entries for the day are over.  
In-Line Reset Report Takings on Master  
Terminal. (Refer to Section 3.2.)  
The “HOLD” condition of the terminal can not be released for some reason, an  
“ENFORCED CLEAR OF HOLD CONDITION” can be operated on individual termi-  
nals. (Refer to Section 3.3.)  
CONSOLIDATED REPORT DATA READ  
if programmed data changes are necessary:  
PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS (Chapter 4)  
DLL OPERATIONS (Chapter 5)  
DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTE-  
NANCE (Chapter 6)  
Turn OFF the power of every terminal to end the business for the day.  
– 2 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
2. OPERATIONS BEFORE IN-LINE SERVICE  
Before entering in-line service operations (In-line Report takings, DLLs, etc.), the following opera-  
tions are available if necessary.  
TERMINAL OPEN CHECK  
This operation sends a dummy text to those terminals set in the TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE  
(Submode 69), and prints out the Register Nos. of the disconnected terminals (i.e. terminals not  
responding).  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal)  
Mode Lock: X and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated  
80  
[AT/TL]  
Master Terminal Receipt Print  
When the check result is normal:  
Prints the Report Name only.  
When any error status is found:  
Prints the Register Nos of the terminals  
not connected properly, as well as the  
Report Name.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
************************  
N O T C O N N E C T  
************************  
0035 14:43TM  
************************  
N O T C O N N E C T  
#3003  
************************  
0024 14:36TM  
- 3 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TERMINAL DESIGNATION  
This operation can be performed before any in-line service operation. When this operation is  
skipped, no specific terminals are designated, i.e., the in-line service operations will be performed  
to all the terminals.  
Any time outside a sale  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock:  
SET, X, or Z (depending on the in-line service operations to  
follow)  
RTR Declaration ON Status (i.e., the IN-LINE Lamp should be illuminated)  
To be operated on the Master Terminal only.  
| Register No. |  
[#]  
[AT/TL]  
[#]  
Enter the Register No. of the  
Terminal subject to the in-line  
service operations to follow.  
Repeat for other terminals if more are subject to  
the in-line service operation.  
NOTE:  
The Terminal Designation once declared by the above operation will be canceled  
by changing the position of the Mode Lock, or by RTR Declaration Cancel, or by  
turning OFF and ON the power of the terminal. The designation is automatically  
canceled on completion of the operation to follow or when a new designation is  
operated.  
ex.) To designate the following Terminal out of two terminals in  
the system:  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Terminal ID No. 3: Register no. 3003  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
Mode Lock: SET (if operated before DLLs)  
The RTR Declaration must be ON (i.e., the IN-LINE Lamp must be  
illuminated; if not, depress the [RTR] key to declare RTR status).  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
P 0 0  
[#]  
3003  
[#]  
[AT/TL]  
03  
#3003  
0023 14:33TM  
(Issues a receipt, printing the Register Nos of the terminals  
designated in the above operation.)  
- 4 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TERMINAL CONDITION CHECK  
This operation checks the condition of the designated terminals, and prints out the status re-  
sponded from the terminals.  
Any time outside a sale (operable on Master Terminal)  
Mode Lock: X and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
81  
[AT/TL]  
Master Terminal Receipt Print  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
Status Symbol  
OK:  
?:  
The terminal condition is normal.  
No response (power-OFF, etc.)  
************************  
T / M C H E C K  
#111101 OK  
BUSY: The terminal is busy (during a sale, etc.).  
Blank: Other statuses  
************************  
0036 14:44TM  
RKP (REMOTE KITCHEN PRINTER) CONDITION CHECK  
This operation checks the conditions of the RKPs connected to the Master Terminal and/or the  
Backup Master Terminal.  
Any time outside a sale  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock:  
X
82  
[AT/TL]  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #1  
Error Code (XX)  
P X 8 2  
90: In-line abnormal (power-OFF of the Master/  
Backup Master Terminal, etc.)  
41: RKP no response (power-OFF of the RKP, etc.)  
42: RKP paper empty  
RKP1  
#1  
#2  
#3  
#4  
OK  
OK  
NG XX  
NG XX  
RKP2  
RKP3  
RKP4  
0037 15:00TM  
- 5 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
3. READ AND RESET REPORTS  
3.1. TERMINAL REPORTS  
Since most reports are taken as in-line reports on the Master Terminal, some of the reports which  
are available on the individual standalone ECR basis cannot be taken on Master or Satellite  
ECRs of the in-line system. The following are the reports which are listed in the MANAGER’S  
GUIDE for the standalone level but cannot be taken on any ECRs of the in-line system. Other  
reports not listed below can be taken even in the in-line system. (Before taking those reports,  
however, please read the next section 3.2.: IN-LINE REPORTS.)  
TERMINAL REPORTS that cannot be taken on any ECRs of the in-line system  
DAILY REPORTS  
GT REPORTS  
REPORT NAME  
REPORT NAME  
CASHIER GT READ AND RESET  
REPORTS  
CASHIER READ AND RESET  
REPORTS  
(when adopting the Floating Cashier  
Feature)  
(when adopting the Floating Cashier Fea-  
ture)  
•
•
•
•
Individual Cashier GT Read  
Individual Cashier GT Reset  
All Cashier GT Read  
•
•
•
•
Individual Cashier Read  
Individual Cashier Reset  
All Cashier Read  
All Cashier GT Reset  
All Cashier Reset  
CUSTOMER FILE READ AND RESET  
REPORTS  
(for Check Track Memory type only)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Individual File Read  
Zone Files Read  
Zone Files Reset  
All Files Read  
All Files Reset  
Zero-balance Files Read  
Debit-balance Files Read  
Credit-balance Files Read  
- 6 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
3.2. IN-LINE REPORTS  
3.2.1. IN-LINE REPORT COMMAND EXECUTIONS  
Before taking in-line reports, please note the following:  
1) In-line Reset Reports (as well as In-line Read Reports) can be taken on the Master Terminal  
as long as the Satellite Terminals are in the idle state (“Signed OFF” condition is not neces-  
sarily required; NOTE below). To check status of all the terminals connected to the in-line  
loop, TERMINAL CONDITION CHECK can be operated (refer to Chapter 2).  
2) When In-line Reports are taken, the power of each Satellite terminal must be turned ON but  
the Mode Lock can be in any positions.  
The operation flow for taking In-line Reports is shown on the next page, and the table of In-line  
Reports is on the following pages.  
The key operation for each In-line Report is the same as the corresponding terminal report  
available on the standalone ECR. However, the key operation can be executed only on the  
Master Terminal while the [RTR] key is turned on.  
Conditions required on terminals for In-line Report takings:  
Read/Reset Reports (Daily or GT)  
Master Terminal:  
Satellite Terminals:  
Any time outside a sale  
(NOTE below)  
Lock Positions Required:  
Master Terminall:  
Mode Lock : X/RTR Declaration : ON  
Mode Lock : Z/RTR Declaration : ON  
Any positions  
Satellite Terminals:  
NOTE:  
Conditions required on the Satellite Terminals for in-line report takings depend on  
the cashier identification features.  
•
Cashier code entry type ............ Satellite Terminal during sign OFF, and sign  
ON with no sales entries performed  
•
Cashier key type........................ Satellite Terminal during idling  
WARNING!  
When opening the cash drawer, be careful not to let the drawer hit any person.  
- 7 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
OPERATION FLOW OF IN-LINE READ OR RESET REPORTS  
To be operated on the  
Master Terminal only  
Designating Some Terminals  
Designating  
All Terminals  
[#]  
Store/Register No.  
of the terminal to be  
designated (max. 6 digits)  
Repeat for all  
the terminals  
to be  
Refer to  
Chapter 2  
designated.  
[#]  
[AT/TL]  
Report Taking Operation for Each Report (see the following pages).  
Refer to  
the following pages.  
E
a
c
h
T
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
’
s
R
e
p
o
r
t
D
a
t
a
C
o
l
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
P
r
o
c
e
s
s
When the option “Individual Terminal Data  
In other cases  
Report Issue” is selected. (applicable to  
Financial Reports only.)  
Each Terminal’s  
Data Print (from  
Master Terminal)  
Incomplete Ending :  
Also refer to Retry,  
Suspending,and  
Cancel operations.  
Uncollected  
Terminals’ Store/  
Register No. Print  
Refer to  
Chapter 12  
Normal Ending  
Consolidated  
Data Report  
End  
- 8 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS  
RTR Declaration : ON  
Mode  
Lock  
Report Name  
Key Operation  
COMBINATION REPORTS  
• Combination 1 Read : Daily  
GT  
X
X
[AT/TL]  
200 [AT/TL]  
• Combination 2 Read : Daily  
GT  
X
X
1 [AT/TL]  
201 [AT/TL]  
• Combination 3 Read : Daily  
GT  
X
X
2 [AT/TL]  
202 [AT/TL]  
• Combination 1 Reset : Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
[AT/TL]  
200 [AT/TL]  
• Combination 2 Reset : Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
1 [AT/TL]  
201 [AT/TL]  
• Combination 3 Reset : Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
2 [AT/TL]  
202 [AT/TL]  
FINANCIAL REPORTS  
• Financial Read:  
• Financial Reset:  
CASHIER REPORTS  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
3 [AT/TL]  
203 [AT/TL]  
Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
3 [AT/TL]  
203 [AT/TL]  
(for the Floating Cashier feature)  
• Individual Cashier Read:  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
4 [#] | Cashier ID Code | [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Start with 204 instead of 4 in the above  
pattern.  
• Individual Cashier Reset:  
Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
4 [#] | Cashier ID Code | [AT/TL]  
(2-digit manager-assign code)  
Start with 204 instead of 4 in the above  
pattern.  
• All store All Cashier Read:  
• All store All Cashier Reset:  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
4 [AT/TL]  
204 [AT/TL]  
Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
4 [AT/TL]  
204 [AT/TL]  
CASHIER REPORTS  
(for the Non-Floating Cashier feature only)  
• Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Read: Daily  
GT  
X
X
4 [ATTL]  
204 [AT/TL]  
• Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Reset: Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
4 [AT/TL]  
204 [AT/TL]  
(To be continued on next page)  
- 9 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS (continued)  
RTR Declaration : ON  
Mode  
Lock  
Report Name  
Key Operation  
SALESPERSON REPORTS  
(Daily only)  
• All-store All Salesperson Read  
• All-store All Salesperson Reset  
X
Z
5 [AT/TL]  
5 [AT/TL]  
CREDIT CARD COMPANY SALES REPORTS  
• Credit Card Company Sales Read:  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
6 [AT/TL]  
206 [AT/TL]  
• Credit Card Company Sales Reset:  
Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
6 [AT/TL]  
206 [ATTL]  
DEPARTMENT GROUP REPORTS  
(Read only)  
• Department Group Read: Daily  
GT  
X
X
8 [AT/TL]  
208 [AT/TL]  
MEDIA SALES AND IN-DRAWER READ  
(Daily only)  
X
9 [AT/TL]  
HOURLY RANGE REPORTS  
• Hourly Read (Daily only)  
• Hourly Reset (Daily only)  
X
Z
10 [AT/TL]  
10 [AT/TL]  
DEPARTMENT REPORTS  
• All Department Read:  
• All Department Reset:  
• Indiv. Department Read:  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
11 [AT/TL]  
211 [AT/TL]  
Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
11 [AT/TL]  
211 [AT/TL]  
(Process Reports; NOTE on the next  
page)  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
11 [#] ➔ [DEPT] (or | Code | [DP#])➔ ([ST])  
Repeat for required departments.  
[AT/TL] (to end)  
Start with 211 instead of 11 in the  
above pattern.  
ALL MEDIA SALES TOTAL AND CASH-IN-DRAWER  
READ (Daily only)  
X
12 [AT/TL]  
(To be continued on next page)  
- 10 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TABLE OF IN-LINE REPORT OPERATIONS (continued)  
RTR Declaration : ON  
Mode  
Lock  
Key Operation  
Report Name  
PLU REPORTS  
• All PLU Read:  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
13 [AT/TL]  
213 [AT/TL]  
• All PLU Reset:  
Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
13 [AT/TL]  
213 [AT/TL]  
• Zone PLU Read:  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
13 [#] ➔ | Zone-start PLU Code |  
[@/FOR] ➔ | Zone-end PLU Code | [AT/TL]  
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above  
pattern.  
• Zone PLU Reset:  
Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
X
13 [#] ➔ | Zone-start PLU Code |  
[@/FOR] ➔ | Zone-end PLU Code | [AT/TL]  
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above  
pattern.  
• Individual PLU Read:  
Daily  
(Process Reports; NOTE below)  
13 [#]  
➔
| PLU Code | [PLU]  
➔
([ST]) [AT/TL]  
Repeat for required PLUs.  
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above  
pattern.  
GT  
X
• Inactive PLU Read:  
(Process Reports; NOTE below)  
13 [#] ➔ 0 [AT/TL]  
Start with 213 instead of 13 in the above  
pattern.  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
PLU GROUP REPORTS  
• PLU Group Read:  
Daily  
GT  
X
X
24 [AT/TL]  
224 [AT/TL]  
• PLU Group Reset:  
Daily  
GT  
Z
Z
24 [AT/TL]  
224 [AT/TL]  
ORDER TABLE REPORTS (for the drive-through  
spec. only)  
• All Order Tacles Read  
• All Order Tables Reset  
X
Z
15 [AT/TL]  
15 [AT/TL]  
CUSTOMER FILE REPORTS  
(for Check Track Memory type only)  
• All Files Read  
• All Files Reset  
• Zone Files Read  
X
Z
X
15 [AT/TL]  
15 [AT/TL]  
15 [#] ➔| Zone-start File Code |  
[@/FOR] | Zone-end File Code | [AT/TL]  
• Zone Files Reset  
Z
15 [#] ➔| Zone-start File Code |  
[@/FOR] | Zone-end File Code | [AT/TL]  
• Individual File Read  
X
X
X
X
15 [#] ➔ | File Code | [@/FOR] ➔ [AT/TL]  
15 [#] ➔0 [AT/TL]  
• Zero-balance Files Read  
• Credit-balance Files Read  
• Debit-balance Files Read  
15 [#] ➔1 [AT/TL]  
15 [#] ➔2 [AT/TL]  
NOTE:  
When the “Process Report” is marked, the report can only be taken after taking another  
report which consolidates the corresponding data to be based on. For further details,  
see the table and descriptions on the next page.  
- 11 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PROCESS REPORTS AND BASE REPORT DATA  
The following table shows which process reports are available after which report data collections.  
Reports Collection Required before Process  
Process Reports available  
Report takings  
(CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: NOTE 1)  
All Department Read Daily  
or  
All Department Reset Daily  
Individual Department Read Daily  
Individual Department Read GT  
All Department Read GT  
or  
All Department Reset GT  
Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE2)  
Individual PLU Read Daily  
Inactive PLU Read Daily  
All PLU Read Daily  
Zone PLU Read Daily  
All PLU Reset Daily  
Zone PLU Reset Daily  
Any of the following PLU reports (NOTE2)  
Individual PLU Read GT  
Inactive PLU Read GT  
All PLU Read GT  
Zone PLU Read GT  
All PLU Reset GT  
Zone PLU Reset GT  
NOTES:  
1) CONSOLIDATION MEMORY CAPTURE: When an in-line read or reset report is  
taken on the Master Terminal, the consolidated data is automatically stored in the  
Consolidation Memory of the Master Terminal. The consolidated data stored there is  
not only used as the data for a Process Report but also sent to the PC by a command  
from the PC when a PC is connected.  
2) The process reports will be outputted based on the report data previously collected.  
For example, when an “Inactive PLU Read” report is taken after a “Zone PLU Read”,  
only the inactive PLUs in the designated zone will be printed on the Inactive Read  
Report. (Only when the PLU is in a local file, a process report is printed. In this case,  
collection of data is required beforehand.)  
3) When individual department reading (daily/GT) is performed, press the [OPEN] key  
before performing all department reading (daily/GT). Then, only the consolidated data  
is created to output the process report.  
- 12 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
3.2.2. IN-LINE REPORT PRINT FORMAT  
IN-LINE REPORT TYPE  
An in-line report can be classified into the following five types.  
1.  
Collects data from each terminal to print a consolidation result:  
All Salesperson, Credit Card Company Sales, Department Group, Hourly Range, All  
Department, All/Zone PLU, and PLU Group Reports  
2.  
3.  
Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal:  
Indiv. Terminal All Cashier Report (Non-floating Cashier)  
Collects data from each terminal to print a collection result per terminal and then print the  
consolidation result:  
Financial, Media Sales & In-drawer and All Media Sales Total & Cash-in-drawer  
Reports  
4.  
5.  
Creates a process data using consolidated data and prints a report:  
Indiv. Department, Indiv. PLU, and Inactive PLU Reports  
Prints data in the center file possessed by the master terminal:  
Indiv./All Cashier (Floating Cashier), and Customer File Reports.  
The print format of each report is basically the same as the format of the corresponding  
standalone terminal report except that some indications are additionally printed as in-line opera-  
tion job IDs. The following is a print format example of the in-line report type 1 described above.  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
RTR Symbol  
************************  
Report Name (When designating a zone, a zone range is printed.)  
For print items, refer to the similar report described in the Stand-  
alone section.  
#111101 0001Z  
#222202 0001Z  
Register No., Reset Count  
(on Reset Report only)  
#999909 0001Z  
************************  
#555505 D D D D  
RTR Symbol  
Unfinished register No. and status  
?:  
No response  
#666606 D D D D  
BUSY: The terminal is busy.  
Blank: Other statuses  
0147 19:27TM  
Consecutive No., Current Time  
- 13 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
JOURNAL INDICATIONS ON INDIVIDUAL TERMINALS (when report data is collected)  
Read Report Collection Indication  
* X 03  
15:40TM*  
Time of data collection  
Report ID No. (X is replaced by Z on reset reports.)  
Reset Report Collection Indication  
* X 03  
= Z 03  
15:40TM*  
15:40TM=  
Time of Clear Command receiving  
3.3. OPERATIONS AFTER IN-LINE REPORT TAKINGS  
The following operations are available after taking in-line reports.  
CONSOLIDATED REPORT DATA READ (REPRINT)  
This operation issues the report data which is remaining in the Consolidation Memory of the  
Master Terminal.  
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: Mode Lock: X/RTR Declaration : ON  
90 [AT/TL]  
When no consolidated data are remaining in the memory, this read operation is unavailable.  
ENFORCED CLEAR OF HOLD CONDITION (on Individual Terminals)  
This can be operated when the HOLD condition on a terminal can by no means be cleared  
because the terminal cannot receive a Clear Command from the Master Terminal for some  
reason (the Master Terminal becomes down, etc. before completion of the reset report data  
collection).  
OPERATION ON ANY TERMINAL IN HOLD CONDTION:  
Mode Lock: Z  
9999 [AT/TL]  
On operating this, the HOLD condition is cleared, and allowing any key-in operations.  
However, this operation is regarded as an emergent measure to cope with such a trouble as the  
Master Terminal becomes down, etc. and thus no other solutions can be chosen, because the  
sales data memory of those reports can no longer be collected by the Master Terminal.  
- 14 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
4. PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS  
The system should be programmed fully by your local TOSHIBA TEC representative at the time of  
delivery according to the user’s requirements so that daily operations can immediately start.  
However, some data must be added or changed daily or in a longer period. Since the volume of  
programming contents for the system is too large, this chapter and the following two chapters are  
provided as guide lines of the user’s daily programming and maintenance operations. If there are  
any unclear points or program data other than listed here must be changed or added, please contact  
your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that some programming operations introduced  
in the Standalone Level are modified or not available on in-line terminals.  
PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS COMMON WITH STANDALONE  
ECR LEVEL  
The following is the table of programming operations which are introduced in the Manager’s  
Guide for the Standalone Level and can be operated on in-line terminals as well, with the  
Submode No. and operation sequence unchanged. However, on in-line terminals, these are  
usually operated on the Master Terminal only and down-line-loaded (DLLed) to all the Satellite  
Terminals. Therefore, if any program data is changed, a DLL is further necessary to Ioad the new  
data (after the change) to all the Satellite Terminals (to be described in Chapter 5).  
PROGRAMMING JOB LIST  
Master:  
Programming is available on the master terminal (when the [RTR] key is turned on  
or the INLINE lamp is on).  
Satellite:  
Programming is available on the master terminal (when the [RTR] key is turned off  
or the INLINE lamp is off), the backup master terminal and the satellite terminal.  
O: Available  
Terminals  
Programming Job  
Submode No.  
Master  
Satellite  
1
2
Store Name/Message, Commercial Message Programming  
Cashier Code and Name Programming  
PLU Table Programming  
O
O
O
O
O
4
O
O
O
5
6
Time Setting or Adjustment  
Date Setting or Adjustment  
O
O
O
8
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys  
Customer File Code (Check Track No.) and Name Setting  
Salesperson Code and Name Programming  
Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting  
PLU Preset-code Key Setting  
15  
20  
26  
27  
31  
35  
42  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Display Message Programming  
Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting  
Set Menu Table Programming  
Department Preset Price Setting or Changing  
PLU Preset Price Setting or Changing, Whole Package Quantity Changing  
% + and % - Preset Rate Setting  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
No  
Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting  
Tax Table Programming  
Submode  
GST Rate Setting  
Store/Register No. Setting  
O
- 15 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS ADDED FOR IN-LINE TERMINALS  
TABLE OF PROGRAMMING OPERATIONS AFTER ADDITION  
(The page No. is the one in this manual)  
(page)  
Submode 69: TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE (added for Master Terminal only)...................... 17  
Submode 77: TERMINAL ID SETTING ........................................................................................... 18  
- 16 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE SETTING (Submode 69)  
This submode is required for in-line services. Enter the In-line ID No. and the Register No. of each  
terminal (including the Master Terminal) connected to the in-line cable.  
Any time outside a sale  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated  
| In-line ID No. | [ST]  
| Register No. | [#]  
69 [@/FOR]  
[AT/TL]  
* For sequentially  
programming In-line  
ID Nos, the In-line ID  
specification can be  
skipped.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1 to 6 ( NOTES 1 & 2 below)  
0 to 999999  
(NOTE 2 below)  
*
Repeat for other terminals to be connected, including the Master  
Terminal itself. (Max. 6 terminals including the Master Terminal.)  
NOTES:  
1. In-line ID No.:  
Master Terminal ... 1 (fixed)  
Backup Master Terminal (if connected) ... 2 (fixed)  
Satellite Terminals ... 3 to 6 (max. 4 terminals)  
2. The In-line ID No. and Register No. of each terminal to be set here must be the  
same as those programmed for the terminal in IN-LINE TERMINAL ID SETTING  
(Submode 77) and STORE/REGISTER NO. SETTING (no submode) in Chapter 6  
in the Manager’s Guide for stand-alone level.  
3. To delete an individual terminal from the Terminal Connection Table, enter 0 in  
place of the In-line ID No. in the above operation pattern.  
4. To delete the entire Terminal Connection Table once set, operate:  
69 [@/FOR]  
0 [AT/TL]  
5. If a deleting operation (individual or entire deletion) is pertormed, the files  
occupied by the deleted terminal(s) (such as Floating Cashier File, etc.) is  
canceled. Therefore, a deleting operation should be performed only when the  
system is to be re-built or a terminal is to be detached from the system.  
ex.): To set a Master Terminal and a Satellite Terminal in the connection table (total of two  
terminals in the in-line system):  
Master Terminal  
Satellite Terminal  
ID No. 1  
ID No. 3  
Register No. 111101  
Register No. 333303  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Mode Lock: SET/and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated  
69 [@/FOR]  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
1 [ST] 111101 [#] (for the Master Terminal)  
3 [ST] 333303 [#] (for the Satellite Terminal)  
[AT/TL]  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
P 6 9  
01  
03  
#111101  
#333303  
0014 14:21TM  
- 17 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TERMINAL ID SETTING (Submode 77)  
This submode is available for in-line terminals (including the master and backup master terminals). It  
must be operated separately on each terminal since the Terminal ID should vary from terminal to  
terminal. The data set in this submode is used as the in-line address of the terminal for in-line service  
operations.  
Any time outside a sale  
Mode Lock: SET  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
[AT/TL]  
77 [@/FOR]  
| Terminal ID No. |  
Assign No. of 1 to 6.  
1: Master  
2: Backup Master  
3 to 6:  
Satellites  
ex.): To assign Terminal ID No. 4 to the terminal used as  
a Satellite Terminal of the in-line system:  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Mode Lock: SET, 77 depress [@/FOR].  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
Enter 4, depress [AT/TL]  
P 7 7  
04  
NOTE: Be certain not to set the same terminal ID No. to termi-  
nals on the in-line system.  
0011 14:16TM  
If terminals with the same ID No. exist on the in-line  
system, malfunction may occur.  
- 18 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
VERIFICATION OF PROGRAMMED DATA RELATED TO IN-LINE  
SPECIFICATIONS  
The programmed data related to in-line specifications can be read for verification purposes.  
A receipt is issued for each operation with the programmed data printed.  
Anytime outside a sale  
CONDITION  
(Sign OFF required under Cashier Signing Method)  
Mode Lock: X or SET  
(RTR Declaration is unnecessary on the Master Terminal.)  
OPERATION  
• Terminal Connection Table.................................................................... 169 [AT/TL]  
• Terminal ID Setting ................................................................................ 177 [AT/TL]  
NOTES:  
1. Verifications listed in the Operator’s Guide of the standalone level are also avail-  
able on all the terminals of the in-line system.  
2. The verification of Terminal Connection Table can be executed on the Satellite  
Terminals after the DLL operation.  
- 19 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
5. DLL (Down-Line-Loading) OPERATIONS  
In an in-line system (Master-Satellite system), most programming data are set on the Master Termi-  
nal and down-line-loaded (DLL) to Satellite Terminals. The DLL operations introduced in this chapter  
are pure DLLs, i.e. merely loading the data programmed in the Master Terminal to Satellite Termi-  
nals. DLLs automatically performed with programmed data changes are introduced in the next  
chapter (Chapter 6). If any other DLLs not introduced in this and next chapters are required, ask  
your TOSHIBA TEC representative. Please also note that TERMINAL DESIGNATION (see Chapter  
2) can be operated prior to a specific DLL operation, to designate Satellite Terminals that receive the  
DLL.  
DLL JOB LIST  
Submode No.  
DLL Job  
Remarks  
501  
502  
504  
505  
508  
520  
526  
527  
531  
535  
542  
569  
Store Name/Message and Commercial Message Programming  
Cashier Code and Name Programming  
PLU Table Programming  
NOTE below  
Time/Date Setting  
Amount Limit Setting for Function Keys  
Salesperson Code and Name Programming  
Tare Table and General Unit Weight Setting  
PLU Preset-code Key Setting  
Display Message Programming  
Negative Amount Key Limit Amount Setting  
Set Menu Table Programming  
Terminal Connection Table Setting  
%+ and %- Preset Rate Setting  
Preset Rate Setting for Selective Itemizers  
Foreign Currency Exchange Rate Setting  
Tax Table Programming  
500  
GST Rate Setting  
NOTE:  
DLL is possible only when the non-floating cashier feature is used.  
- 20 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Terminals including the Master: Any time outside a sale  
(Sign OFF condition is not necessarily required for the Code Entry Method)  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Satellite Terminals: Any position if the power is ON  
Master Terminal: Mode Lock: SET  
RTR Declaration: ON  
| X X X |  
Submode No.  
[AT/TL]  
PRINT FORMAT OF DLL OPERATIONS  
Master Terminal Receipt  
TEC STORE  
1343 PEACH DRIVE  
PHONE : 87-6437  
Satellite Terminal Journal  
Open 8:00am to 7:00pm  
Closed : every Wednesday  
* P5xx  
18:02TM*  
12-19-1994 MON #3001  
Time of receiving the DLL  
************************  
P 5 X X  
************************  
0011 14:16TM  
5xx = Subomod No.  
of the specific  
DLL operation  
- 21 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
6. DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE  
In this chapter, adding, changing, or deleting operation related to Department Table and PLU Table  
program data are described. These are operated on the Master Terminal only. All of these opera-  
tions are loaded into Satellite Terminals at the same time.  
TABLE OF DEPARTMENT AND PLU MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS  
Mode  
... Submode  
page  
PLU TABLE ADDITION/CHANGE/DELETION WITH DLL ...... SET/RTR............ 63................. 23  
DEPARTMENT PRESET PRICE SETTING OR  
CHANGING WITH DLL ............................................................ SET/RTR............ 72................. 24  
PLU PRICE CHANGE WITH DLL ............................................ SET/RTR............ 73................. 25  
- 22 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU TABLE ADDITION/CHANGE/DELETION WITH DLL (Submode 63)  
This submode can be operated only on the Master Terminal in an in-line system. This submode allows  
additions/changes/deletions of PLUs in the PLU Table File (generated by Submode 4 in the Manager’s  
Guide for stand-alone level). The data entered in this submode is immediately loaded into Satellite  
Terminals, item by item.  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
All the terminals: After PLU Daily and GT Resets  
Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated  
Barcode Scanning  
| PLU Code |  
63 [X]  
| Address Nos | [#]  
[PLU]  
.
.
.
.
Makes the desig-  
for sequential-coded item only  
nated terminals into  
HOLD condition.  
Address 1: Link Department  
| Department Code |  
[#]  
1 [ST]  
(1 to 99)  
Address 2: PLU Name  
Operation  
procedure  
surrounded  
by this line is  
the same as  
the operation  
in Submode  
4.  
[ST]  
Character Entries  
2 [ST]  
max. 16 characters  
Address 3: Preset Price  
[#]  
| Price |  
3 [ST]  
(max. 6 digits)  
Address 4: Status 1 Codes  
4 [ST]  
| Status Codes to ON | [#]  
Pepeat for any  
address within  
the same PLU  
by re-entry for  
correction.  
Address 5: Status 2 Codes  
[#]  
[#]  
| Status Codes to ON |  
5 [ST]  
Address 6: Tax Status  
-
| Status Codes to ON |  
6 [ST]  
(max. 4 digits)  
Repeat for  
Address 8: Whole Package Quantity  
other PLUs.  
[#]  
| Whole Package Quantity |  
8 [ST]  
(max. 2 digits)  
Address 9: PLU Group No.  
| PLU Group No. |  
[#]  
9 [ST]  
(1to 99; 0 to reset)  
Address 11: Tare Table No.  
| Tare Table No. | [#]  
11 [ST]  
(1 to 9; 0 to reset)  
-
Address 12: Unit Weight  
| Unit Weight Table Code |  
[#]  
12 [ST]  
(1 to 10; 0 to reset)  
[ST]  
[AT/TL] (to complete this submode)  
Executes DLL.  
- 23 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
Deletion  
The sales data of the required PLUs are zero and all terminals are outside a  
sale, programming, or report taking operations.  
CONDITION  
Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated  
OPERATION  
| PLU Code | [PLU]  
[ITEM CORR]  
[ST]  
[AT/TL]  
63 [X]  
Repeatable for other PLUs to be deleted.  
DEPARTMENT PRESET PRICE SETTING OR CHANGING WITH DLL  
(Submode 72)  
This submode is used to newly set or change preset prices to required departments, and loads  
the price data into Satellite Terminals.  
Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite  
Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
| New Preset Price |  
[DEPT]  
(Department Preset-code Key)  
Max. 6 digits; 0 to 999999  
(result): $0.00 to $9999.99)  
[AT/TL]  
(NOTE 1)  
72 [@/FOR]  
| Dept Code |  
[DP#]  
| New Preset Price |  
[#]  
*
Repeatable for other departments.  
*
For sequentially programming the department, the  
Dept Code specification can be skipped.  
NOTES:  
1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, it sends a DLL-start  
command to the designated terminals, makes the terminals in HOLD condition, and  
executes DLL. After DLL is completed, it sends a DLL-end command to each termi-  
nal and releases the HOLD condition.  
2. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the department is set with a  
zero price. When the New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [DEPT] or [#] is  
simply depressed, it will be an open-price department.  
- 24 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
PLU PRICE CHANGE WITH DLL (Submode 73)  
This submode is used to change prices of PLUs and/or the Whole Package Quantity changes of  
Split Package Pricing PLUs existent in the PLU files, and to immediately load the data into  
Satellite Terminals.  
Any time outside a sale for Master or Satellite.  
Mode Lock: SET and IN-LINE Lamp illuminated  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Can be skipped (for non-Split Pricing type  
or when Whole Package Quantity is 1)  
[ST]  
| New Whole Package Quantity |  
Max. 6 digits  
[PLU]  
73 [@/FOR]  
| PLU Code |  
[#]  
Repeat for  
| New Preset Price |  
to make open-price PLU  
[AT/TL]  
(NOTE 1)  
other PLUs.  
*
* (Repeatable from here for sequentially programming PLU Codes.)  
NOTES:  
1. When the [AT/TL] key is depressed in the above operation, it sends a DLL-start  
command to the designated terminals, makes the terminals in HOLD condition,  
and executes DLL. After DLL is completed, it sends a DLL-end command to each  
terminal and releases the HOLD condition.  
2. A maximum of 100 PLUs’ prices can be changed in one operation sequence of  
this submode.  
3. When zero is entered as the New Preset Price value, the PLU is set with a zero  
price.  
When the New Preset Price entry is skipped and the [#] is simply depressed, it will  
be an open-price PLU.  
- 25 -  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
7. INQUIRIES  
This chapter describes various inquiries made from each terminal to the Master Terminal and affect  
data (sales data updating).  
7.1. CASHIER OCCUPY INQUIRIES  
When the “Floating Cashier” feature is selected and a Cashier Code is entered on a terminal, the  
terminal inquires the cashier code corresponding to cashier code entered to the Master Terminal.  
The Master Terminal searches the Cashier Table of the Cashier No. in the Cashier File.  
When the Cashier No. exists and its table is not occupied by any other terminal, the Master  
Terminal makes the cashier in the occupied status and sends the cashier table to the inquiring  
terminal.  
When the Cashier No. does not exist in the Master Terminal’s Cashier File, the Master Termi-  
nal responds the message “CODE ERROR” (standard program; programmable) to the inquir-  
ing terminal. When the Cashier Table is occupied by another terminal, the message “FILE  
BUSY” (standard program; programmable) is responded instead.  
AFFECT  
When a sale entry is determined (i.e. finalized) on a terminal, the terminal sends AFFECT text  
to the Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal) and updates the sales data (in the  
Cashier Table) of the Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal).  
CASHIER CANCEL INQUIRES (OCCUPY CANCEL)  
When a Sign-OFF is operated on a terminal, the terminal inquires a CASHIER CANCEL to the  
Master Terminal. The Master Terminal cancels the occupies status of the applicable cashier.  
7.2. CUSTOMER FILE (CHECK TRACK) INQUIRIES  
When the feature “Customer File (Check Track)” (instead of PB Manual Entry) is selected and a  
PICK UP BALANCE (by [PICK UP BAL]) is entered on a terminal, the terminal inquires the  
entered Customer File Code to the Master Terminal. The inquired Master Terminal searches the  
Customer File Code in the Customer File Table.  
When the Customer File Code exists, the Master Terminal responds the name and the previ-  
ous balance of the Customer File to the inquiring terminal.  
NEW CUSTOMER FILE INQUIRIES  
When a NEW CUSTOMER FILE (by [CODE OPEN] key) is entered on a terminal, the termi-  
nal inquires the new Customer File code entered to the Master Terminal. The Master Terminal  
confirms that the inquired Customer File code does not exist, then adds it to the Customer File  
table, and responds to the inquiring terminal that the code has been additionally set. (If a  
Backup Master is connected, the code inquiry to and additional setting in the Backup Master  
Terminal occur at the same time.)  
AFFECT  
When a Customer File entry is determined on a terminal, the terminal sends an AFFECT text  
to the Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal), and updates the sales data of the  
Master Terminal (and Backup Master Terminal).  
NOTE: When the applicable file code does not exist on a Customer File Code inquiry (by [PICK  
UP BAL]) or when the applicable file code exists on a New Customer File Code inquiry  
(by [CODE OPEN]), the message “CODE ERROR” (standard program; programmable)  
is displayed on the inquiring terminal.  
– 26 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
7.3. RKP PRINT DATA TRANSMISSION AND RKP CONDITION  
CHECK INQUIRIES  
RKP PRINT DATA TRANSMISSION  
RKP print data from each terminal is transmitted to the Master Terminal and/or the Backup  
Master Terminal, and the print outputted from the RKP becomes possible.  
RKP CONDITION CHECK INQUIRIES  
Print condition of RKPs connected to the Master Terminal and/or the Backup Master Terminal  
can be checked by the operation on each terminal.  
The terminal inquires of the Master Terminal and/or the Backup Master Terminal the print  
conditions of the RKPs. The Master Terminal and/or the Backup Master Terminal respond(s)  
the check result to the inquiring terminal. (Refer to “RKP (REMOTE KITCHEN PRINTER)  
CONDITION CHECK” on page 5.)  
– 27 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
8. BACKUP FUNCTION  
(ONLY WHEN THE BACKUP MASTER IS CONNECTED)  
(1) Function  
•
•
By connecting the backup master terminal (BM), the various files stored in the master terminal  
(M) can be backed up.  
The terminal assigned to ID No. 2 will function as a backup master terminal (BM). By pro-  
gramming ID No. 2 in the terminal connection table and downloading this data to each termi-  
nal, the system will function as a system in which the backup master terminal (BM) is con-  
nected.  
•
By changing terminal ID from 2 to 1, the backup master terminal (BM) will function as the  
master terminal (M).  
<Files to be Backed Up>  
Cashier Table  
(When the floating cashier system is used)  
Program data  
Sales data  
Customer File (Check Track) Table  
PC Transmission Information Table  
Program data  
Sales data  
Program data  
NOTE:  
The tables (center files) managed by the master terminal (M) and used by each  
terminal via inquiries and PC transmission information tables are backed up.  
•
•
Sales data is backed up on a real-time basis.  
When sales data of the master terminal (M) is updated, sales data of the backup master  
terminal (BM) is updated at the same time.  
Backup data check function:  
Correspondence between the center files and backup data is checked every certain period of  
time.  
– 28 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
•
Backup data update process:  
When an error occurs in backup data, the following processing methods can be selected  
according to the program option setting.  
(1) Automatic data copy  
When the version of the center file stored in the master terminal (M) is different from that  
stored in the backup master terminal (BM), registration jobs are automatically prohibited,  
the backup data is properly exchanged.  
While updating the backup data, each inquiry from the terminals may result in a “MASTER  
IS BUSY” error.  
(2) Manual data copy  
When the version of the center file stored in the master terminal (M) is different from that of  
data stored in the backup master terminal (BM), the master terminal (M) gives a short beep  
at the timing of issuing the long receipt to warn that the data is not backed up properly.  
The operator should update the backup data manually.  
(2) Procedure  
1) Changing Program Data (DLL from the PC)  
DLL data  
Backup data  
Response  
BM  
M
PC  
Response  
•
When various center files from the PC are received via DLL, the master terminal (M) backs  
up program data and sales data of the backup master terminal (BM) automatically and  
sends the result to the PC.  
2) Changing Program Data (Operated on the Master Terminal)  
Prrogramming Operation  
M
•
When center files are being programmed on the master terminal (M), the backup error flag  
of the relevant file is turned on. (At this time, backup data is not updated.)  
*
*
For details about the backup error flag, refer to 5) Backup Error Flag.  
For an explanation of the backup data update process, refer to 6) Backup Data Update  
Process.  
3) Updating Sales Data  
•
For details about updating sales data, refer to the explanation of each of the control func-  
tions described in Chapter 7.  
– 29 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
4) Checking Backup Data  
Version request  
Version data  
BM  
M
•
•
•
The master terminal (M) sends the version request command to the backup master termi-  
nal (BM) every certain period of time and receives version information about the backup  
data.  
The master terminal (M) checks correspondence between the version information received  
from the backup master terminal (BM) and the center files (stored in the M). If an abnor-  
mality is found, the backup error flag is turned on.  
When a master job is being performed on the master terminal (M) ([RTR] key turned on),  
or a PC job is being performed backup data is not checked.  
5) Backup Error Flag  
•
When there is any difference between the data stored in the master terminal (M) and the  
backup data stored in the backup master terminal (BM), the master terminal (M) turns on  
the backup error flag of the file in which a difference was found.  
•
There are following four cases when the backup error flag is turned on.  
The master terminal (M) changes the programming of the center files.  
A version error is found at the backup data check.  
The backup job fails after the center file has been downloaded from the PC.  
Updating of the backup data fails after the center files have been reset.  
•
While the backup error flag is on, the following operation is performed.  
The master terminal (M) gives a short beep at the timing when the long receipt is  
printed to warn that a backup error has occurred.  
The RTR declaration cancel operation results in compulsory manual data copy error.  
(The error indication “PLEASE BACK UP” is displayed.)  
In this case, the RTR declaration is not canceled until the manual data copy operation  
is performed.  
•
There are two timings cases the backup error flag is turned off.  
The backup data is properly backed up according to the backup data update process.  
The backup master terminal (ID No. 2) is deleted from the terminal connection table.  
– 30 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
6) Backup Data Update Process  
(This is a process required when the backup data stored in the backup master terminal (BM) is  
not updated properly due to an error.)  
Backup data  
M
BM  
Response  
•
The method processing backup error is selected according to the program option setting.  
Even if the automatic data copy operation is selected, data copy can be performed manu-  
ally.  
•
Automatic data copy (program option)  
When the backup error flag is on (or turned on), the master terminal (M) automatically  
sends to the backup master terminal (BM) the file in which the error has occurred, and  
updates the backup data.  
•
Manual data copy (program option)  
The backup data is updated by the manual operations of the operator.  
*
*
*
*
*
When the backup data is being updated, inquiries from terminals may result in a “MASTER  
IS BUSY” error.  
When a “MASTER IS BUSY” error occurs, clear the error using the [C] key.  
Then, update the backup data again after the master job (backup process) is complete.  
Only the files with the backup error flag turned on are sent to the backup master terminal  
(BM) to update the backup data.  
When the master job is being done on the master terminal (M) ([RTR] key is turned on),  
backup data is not checked or updated.  
If the backup error flag is on when the master job is complete on the master terminal (M)  
([RTR] key is turned off; the IN-LINE lamp is off), manual data copy becomes compulsory.  
7) Manual Copy of Backup Data  
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: Mode Lock : Z and IN-LINE  
Lamp illuminated  
900 [AT/TL]  
– 31 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
9. MASTER AND BACKUP MASTER ALTERNATION  
The Backup Master Terminal can be changed to be used as the Master Terminal for an accident that  
the Master Terminal becomes down, etc. And the Master Terminal can be changed to be used as  
the Backup Master when it comes back from repair, etc.  
To switch from the Backup Master Terminal function to the Master Terminal function  
Disconnect the master terminal from the line.  
When other terminals are in registration operation, finalize and cashier sign-off, operations should  
be performed.  
Since a transmission error occurs at this time, an inquiry job should be completed.  
Change the backup master terminal address from 2 (BM) to 1 (M). (Therefore, the backup  
master terminal will function as the master terminal.)  
Refer to TERMINAL ID SETTING (Submode 77) on Chapter 4.  
Delete the backup master terminal from the terminal connection table on the master terminal.  
(Reprogramming is required.)  
Refer to TERMINAL CONNECTION TABLE SETTING (Submode 69) on Chapter 4.  
Download the terminal connection table.  
The following files are guaranteed when the recovery process is performed. If a file is used in an-  
other terminal when the master terminal goes down, however, data stored in the terminal is not  
guaranteed.  
•
•
Files controlled in the master terminal (cashier file)  
PC transmission information  
The following files and data are lost when the master terminal goes down.  
•
•
•
Data which is being outputted from RKP 1 and 2.  
Files controlled locally on the master terminal  
Data in the files which are used by other terminals when the master terminal goes down.  
10. RKP DATA PRINT FROM RECEIPT/JOURNAL  
During the RKP failure, the data in the RKP pool buffer on the Master/Backup Master Terminal can  
be outputted from the receipt/Journal (Issuance of RKP pool buffer report).  
Any time outside a sale  
CONDITION  
OPERATION  
Mode Lock: X (operable on the Master Terminal or the Backup Master Termi-  
nal)  
83 [AT/TL]  
RKP text from the Satellite Terminals can not be accepted during this operation.  
NOTE:  
11. TRANSMISSION ERROR  
When a terminal makes an inquiry but a communication error occurs for some reason and the  
inquiry to the other station is not possible, the message “IRC CONNECT ERR” (standard program:  
programmable) is displayed on that terminal and operation is stopped.  
When the Master Terminal cannot access the inquiring file because the Master Terminal is receiving  
DLL data, the backup data is being updated between the Master and the Backup Master terminals,  
etc., the message “MASTER IS BUSY” (standard program; programmable) is displayed and opera-  
tion is stopped.  
– 32 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
11.1.CAUSE OF ERROR  
11.1.1. “IRC CONNECT ERR”  
a) Communication with the other station is not possible due to a connection error (cable cut,  
Master Terminal’s Power-OFF, etc.).  
b) Communication was made, but due to a text error, the other station cannot recognize it  
correctly (except RKP condition check and RKP print data transmission).  
11.1.2. "MASTER IS BUSY"  
Cannot access the inquiring file due to the following causes:  
a) The Master Terminal is receiving DLL data from the PC.  
b) Programming operations are under way on the Master Terminal.  
c) Backup data updating process is under way.  
d) Read/Reset Report taking operation is under way on the Master Terminal.  
e) ULL operations are under way on the Master Terminal.  
11.2.ERROR DISPLAY  
IRC CONNECT ERR  
<16-digit Dot Windows>  
I R C  
C O N N E C T  
E R 0 1  
Terminal ID of the  
other station  
MASTER IS BUSY  
<16-digit Dot Windows>  
M A S  
T E R  
I S  
B U S Y  
NOTE: The display contents in the 7-segment portion remains the same as before the error  
occurrence. The error status will be canceled by the [C] key.  
11.3.ERROR CANCELING PROCESS  
There are two error-canceling processes in accordance with the inquiring job contents.  
TYPE 1: Depressing the [C] key will return to the statuses before the inquiry.  
Applicable Jobs:  
* Cashier Occupy Inquiry  
* Customer File (Check Track) Inquiry  
TYPE 2: Depressing the [C] key will cancel the error status, displays the following message, and  
waits for RETRY or CANCEL.  
Applicable Jobs:  
* Cashier Affect  
* Cashier Cancel Inquiry  
* Customer File (Check Track) Affect  
<16-digit Dot Windows>  
R E T  
R Y ?  
For Retry .............. [AT/TL] (Performs re-sending to the other station.)  
For Cancel ........... [X] [ST] (Stops the inquiry, printing on journal “** X  
ST**”)  
NOTE:  
The “Cancel” in Type 2 above is for only the case the other station is in trouble which  
cannot be recovered by a Retry operation.  
– 33 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
12. OTHER OPERATIONS RELATING TO IN-LINE  
SERVICE  
The followings are other operations relating to in-line service operations.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Page  
TIME OUT ....................................................................................................................................... 35  
SUSPENDING ................................................................................................................................ 36  
RETRY ............................................................................................................................................ 36  
INCOMPLETE ENDING.................................................................................................................. 36  
CANCEL ......................................................................................................................................... 37  
– 34 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
TIME OUT  
A Time-Out condition arises when the Master Terminal is making an in-line service operation, such  
as X/Z report collection, DLL, etc. to the Satellite Terminals. The service timer is provided for  
servicing each of the Satellite Terminals, thus on exceeding the time limit, a Time-Out condition will  
occur. In this case, a “RETRY”, “SUSPENDING”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CANCEL” operation  
will be accepted.  
ex. 1) : In a system with a Master Terminal and 3 Satellite Terminals:  
MASTER  
TERMINAL  
S3  
busy  
busy  
S2  
S1  
When a report collection is executed on the Master Terminal, a series of data collections from each  
terminal (S1 to S3) will be performed, but services for S1 and S2 will be skipped due to their “busy”  
conditions. Thereafter, services will again be attempted to S1 and S2. As a limit of 30 seconds is  
provided for servicing each terminal, the total service time in this case will be 30 sec. x 2 units = 60  
sec. If data collection is successfully done from S1 within this time limit, servicing S2 follows for the  
rest of the time, and on reaching the time limit, the Time-Out condition arises, displaying on the  
Master Terminal the number of not-yet collected terminal(s) and the Store/Register No. of the last  
serviced terminal. On this stage, the operator may only go on to “SUSPENDING” (to wait for a while  
until S2 clears the “busy” condition), or to “RETRY” (to execute collection service to S2 again,  
expecting that S2 has already cleared the “busy” condition), or to “INCOMPLETE ENDING” (to  
abandon the service to S2 and end with collection of the data of so-far collected terminals only), or  
to “CANCEL” operation. If “RETRY” is operated, the service time now is 30 seconds because only  
one terminal remains uncollected.  
ex. 2) :  
MASTER  
TERMINAL  
No response  
S3  
busy  
(Power OFF)  
S2  
S1  
In this case, S2 is in a “No response” condition and S1 is in a “busy” condition. As only one terminal  
is responding with some kind of status, a time out limit of 30 seconds is given (the “No response”  
status is not subject to the service timer). However, if S2 turns into a “Power ON” condition, it will  
also be subject to the service timer.  
– 35 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
SUSPENDING  
This is to be operated for the purpose of suspending an in-line service being executed, when any  
terminals remain unserviced, and of going on to a “RETRY”, “INCOMPLETE ENDING”, or “CAN-  
CEL” operation as the next step.  
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)  
Depress [ITEM CORR] unit the key-in tone is generated.  
DESCRIPTION:  
The SUSPENDING operation is allowed any time during an in-line service procedure.  
If suspending by the [ITEM CORR] key is accepted, the Master terminal’s display indicates the  
number of unserviced terminals. (SUSPENDING of a service execution of one terminal is not  
possible). Now a “RETRY” or “INCOMPLETE ENDING” operation can be selected as the next  
step. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a SUSPENDING opera-  
tion, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.)  
RETRY  
This is to be operated for the purpose of re-attempting the in-line service that has been stopped due  
to “TIME OUT” or that has just been suspended by “SUSPENDING” operation.  
OPERATION ON MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)  
Depress [AT/TL].  
DESCRIPTION:  
The in-line service will again be attempted to the unserviced terminals. This operation is possible  
any number of times after a “TIME OUT” condition or a “SUSPENDING” operation as long as any  
terminals remain unserviced. (When no key-in operations are made in about 10 seconds after a  
SUSPENDING operation, a RETRY process will automatically be executed.)  
INCOMPLETE ENDING  
This is to be operated to abandon services to unserviced terminals, and ends the in-line service with  
the services to service-completed terminals only.  
OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Same Lock positions as the in-line job being performed)  
Depress [NS].  
DESCRIPTION:  
If an in-line service being executed does not seem to end normally due perhaps to some abnormal  
status of any Satellite Terminals after “TIME OUT”, “SUSPENDING”, and/or ‘’RETRY” operations,  
the [NS] key can be depressed to end the in-line service with only the service-completed terminals  
serviced and the unserviced terminals remaining unserviced. In case of In-line X or Z Report Collec-  
tion sequences, reports of only the service-completed terminals will be issued.  
– 36 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EO1-11113  
As part of the print out, the Store/Reg. No. of the terminal and its status will be printed.  
Status Print Format  
No nnnnnn ?  
Status Symbol  
Store/Register No.  
?
: No response (power off, etc.)  
BUSY : The terminal is busy (during a sale, etc.)  
Blank : Other statuses  
CANCEL  
This can be operated when a SUSPENDING condition arises due to a TIME OUT or a SUSPEND-  
ING operation. The entire in-line service being performed is canceled. This operation is effective to  
in-line read report operations but not to any in-line reset report operations.  
OPERATION MASTER TERMINAL: (Mode Lock: X)  
Depress [@/FOR].  
DESCRIPTION:  
The CANCEL symbol is printed as in the following.  
CANCEL Print Format  
– 37 –  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINTED IN JAPAN  
E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tascam VCR DR 05 User Manual
TiVo DVR SDOC 00102 001 User Manual
Toshiba Welding System STE 58762 User Manual
Tricity Bendix Refrigerator FD 792 User Manual
Tunturi Home Gym E 860 User Manual
U Line Ice Maker CO2175FF User Manual
Verilux Indoor Furnishings VD06 User Manual
Victor Technology Calculator 1212 3A Series User Manual
VTech Cordless Telephone t2415 User Manual
WatchGuard Technologies Cell Phone V100 User Manual